| [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] |
GNU LilyPond — Notation Reference
The music typesetter
This document is also available as a PDF and as a HTML indexed multiple pages.
This file documents GNU LilyPond.
Copyright 1999–2009 by the authors
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled “GNU Free Documentation License”.
This is the Notation Reference (NR) for GNU LilyPond version 2.12.3. For more information about how this fits with the other documentation, see About the documentation.
More information can be found at http://www.lilypond.org/. The website contains on-line copies of this and other documentation.
We want to dedicate this program to all the friends that we met through music.
Han-Wen and Jan
| 1. Musical notation | ||
| 2. Specialist notation | Notation which is only used for specific purposes. | |
| 3. General input and output | General information about lilypond input and output. | |
| 4. Spacing issues | Display of output on paper. | |
| 5. Changing defaults | Tuning output. | |
| 6. Interfaces for programmers | Expert usage. | |
Appendices | ||
|---|---|---|
| A. Literature list | Reference works about music notation. | |
| B. Notation manual tables | Tables and charts. | |
| C. Cheat sheet | Summary of LilyPond syntax. | |
| D. LilyPond grammar | Syntax diagram for LilyPond parser. | |
| E. GNU Free Documentation License | License of this document. | |
| F. LilyPond command index | ||
| G. LilyPond index | ||
| [ << Top ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Top ] | [ Up : Top ] | [ Pitches > ] | ||
1. Musical notation
This chapter explains how to create musical notation.
| 1.1 Pitches | Writing and display the pitches of notes. | |
| 1.2 Rhythms | Writing and displaying the durations of notes. | |
| 1.3 Expressive marks | Adding expression to notes. | |
| 1.4 Repeats | Repeat music. | |
| 1.5 Simultaneous notes | More than one note at once. | |
| 1.6 Staff notation | Displaying staves. | |
| 1.7 Editorial annotations | Special notation to increase legibility. | |
| 1.8 Text | Adding text to scores. |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Musical notation ] | [ Up : Musical notation ] | [ Writing pitches > ] | ||
1.1 Pitches
This section discusses how to specify the pitch of notes. There are three steps to this process: input, modification, and output.
| 1.1.1 Writing pitches | ||
| 1.1.2 Changing multiple pitches | ||
| 1.1.3 Displaying pitches | ||
| 1.1.4 Note heads |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Pitches ] | [ Up : Pitches ] | [ Absolute octave entry > ] | ||
1.1.1 Writing pitches
This section discusses how to input pitches. There are two different ways to place notes in octaves: absolute and relative mode. In most cases, relative mode will be more convenient.
| Absolute octave entry | ||
| Relative octave entry | ||
| Accidentals | ||
| Note names in other languages |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Writing pitches ] | [ Up : Writing pitches ] | [ Relative octave entry > ] | ||
Absolute octave entry
A pitch name is specified using lowercase letters a
through g. The note names c to b are
engraved in the octave below middle C.
\clef bass c d e f g a b c d e f g
Other octaves may be specified with a single quote (')
or comma (,) character. Each ' raises the
pitch by one octave; each , lowers the pitch by an
octave.
\clef treble c' c'' e' g d'' d' d c \clef bass c, c,, e, g d,, d, d c
See also
Music Glossary: Pitch names.
Snippets: Pitches.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Absolute octave entry ] | [ Up : Writing pitches ] | [ Accidentals > ] | ||
Relative octave entry
When octaves are specified in absolute mode it is easy to accidentally put a pitch in the wrong octave. Relative octave mode reduces these errors since most of the time it is not necessary to indicate any octaves at all. Furthermore, in absolute mode a single mistake may be difficult to spot, while in relative mode a single error puts the rest of the piece off by one octave.
\relative startpitch musicexpr
In relative mode, each note is assumed to be as close to the previous note as possible. This means that the octave of each pitch inside musicexpr is calculated as follows:
- If no octave changing mark is used on a pitch, its octave is calculated so that the interval with the previous note is less than a fifth. This interval is determined without considering accidentals.
-
An octave changing mark
'or,can be added to respectively raise or lower a pitch by an extra octave, relative to the pitch calculated without an octave mark. -
Multiple octave changing marks can be used. For example,
''and,,will alter the pitch by two octaves. -
The pitch of the first note is relative to
startpitch. startpitch is specified in absolute octave mode, and it is recommended that it be a octave ofc.
Here is the relative mode shown in action:
\relative c {
\clef bass
c d e f
g a b c
d e f g
}
Octave changing marks are used for intervals greater than a fourth:
\relative c'' {
c g c f,
c' a, e'' c
}
A note sequence without a single octave mark can nevertheless span large intervals:
\relative c {
c f b e
a d g c
}
If the preceding item is a chord, the first note of the chord is
used as the reference point for the octave placement of a
following note or chord. Inside chords, the next note is always
relative to the preceding one. Examine the next example
carefully, paying attention to the c notes.
\relative c' {
c
<c e g>
<c' e g'>
<c, e, g''>
}
As explained above, the octave of pitches is calculated only with the note names, regardless of any alterations. Therefore, an E-double-sharp following a B will be placed higher, while an F-double-flat will be placed lower. In other words, a double-augmented fourth is considered a smaller interval than a double-diminished fifth, regardless of the number of semitones that each interval contains.
\relative c'' {
c2 fis
c2 ges
b2 eisis
b2 feses
}
See also
Music Glossary: fifth, interval, Pitch names.
Notation Reference: Octave checks.
Snippets: Pitches.
Internals Reference: RelativeOctaveMusic.
Known issues and warnings
The relative conversion will not affect \transpose,
\chordmode or \relative sections in its argument.
To use relative mode within transposed music, an additional
\relative must be placed inside \transpose.
If no startpitch is specified for \relative,
then c' is assumed. However, this is a deprecated
option and may disappear in future versions, so its use is
discouraged.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Relative octave entry ] | [ Up : Writing pitches ] | [ Note names in other languages > ] | ||
Accidentals
|
Note: New users are sometimes confused about accidentals and
key signatures. In LilyPond, note names are the raw input; key
signatures and clefs determine how this raw input is displayed.
An unaltered note like |
A sharp pitch is made by adding is to the note
name, and a flat pitch by adding es. As you
might expect, a double sharp or double flat
is made by adding isis or eses. This syntax is
derived from Dutch note naming conventions. To use other names
for accidentals, see Note names in other languages.
ais1 aes aisis aeses
A natural will cancel the effect of an accidental or key signature. However, naturals are not encoded into the note name syntax with a suffix; a natural pitch is shown as a simple note name:
a4 aes a2
Quarter tones may be added; the following is a series of Cs with increasing pitches:
ceseh1 ces ceh c cih cis cisih
Normally accidentals are printed automatically, but you may also
print them manually. A reminder accidental can be forced by
adding an exclamation mark ! after the pitch. A
cautionary accidental (i.e., an accidental within parentheses) can
be obtained by adding the question mark ? after the
pitch. These extra accidentals can also be used to produce
natural signs.
cis cis cis! cis? c c c! c?
Accidentals on tied notes are only printed at the beginning of a new system:
cis1 ~ cis ~ \break cis
Selected Snippets
Preventing extra naturals from being automatically added
In accordance with standard typesetting rules, a natural sign is
printed before a sharp or flat if a previous accidental on the same
note needs to be canceled. To change this behavior, set the
extraNatural property to "false" in the Staff context.
\relative c'' {
aeses4 aes ais a
\set Staff.extraNatural = ##f
aeses4 aes ais a
}
Makam example
Makam is a type of melody from Turkey using 1/9th-tone microtonal alterations. Consult the initialization file ‘ly/makam.ly’ for details of pitch names and alterations.
% Initialize makam settings
\include "makam.ly"
\relative c' {
\set Staff.keySignature = #`((3 . ,BAKIYE) (6 . ,(- KOMA)))
c4 cc db fk
gbm4 gfc gfb efk
fk4 db cc c
}
See also
Music Glossary: sharp, flat, double sharp, double flat, Pitch names, quarter tone.
Learning Manual: Accidentals and key signatures.
Notation Reference: Automatic accidentals, Annotational accidentals (musica ficta), Note names in other languages.
Snippets: Pitches.
Internals Reference: Accidental_engraver, Accidental, AccidentalCautionary, accidental-interface.
Known issues and warnings
There are no generally accepted standards for denoting quarter-tone accidentals, so LilyPond’s symbol does not conform to any standard.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Accidentals ] | [ Up : Writing pitches ] | [ Changing multiple pitches > ] | ||
Note names in other languages
There are predefined sets of note and accidental names for various
other languages. To use them, include the language-specific init
file listed below. For example, to use English note names, add
\include "english.ly" to the input file.
|
Note: Because some other include files (such as |
The available language files and the note names they define are:
Language File
Note Names
‘nederlands.ly’
c d e f g a bes b
‘arabic.ly’
do re mi fa sol la sib si
‘catalan.ly’
do re mi fa sol la sib si
‘deutsch.ly’
c d e f g a b h
‘english.ly’
c d e f g a bf b
‘espanol.ly’
do re mi fa sol la sib si
‘italiano.ly’
do re mi fa sol la sib si
‘norsk.ly’
c d e f g a b h
‘portugues.ly’
do re mi fa sol la sib si
‘suomi.ly’
c d e f g a b h
‘svenska.ly’
c d e f g a b h
‘vlaams.ly’
do re mi fa sol la sib si
and the accidental suffixes they define are:
Language File
sharp
flat
double sharp
double flat
‘nederlands.ly’
-is
-es
-isis
-eses
‘arabic.ly’
-d
-b
-dd
-bb
‘catalan.ly’
-d/-s
-b
-dd/-ss
-bb
‘deutsch.ly’
-is
-es
-isis
-eses
‘english.ly’
-s/-sharp
-f/-flat
-ss/-x/-sharpsharp
-ff/-flatflat
‘espanol.ly’
-s
-b
-ss
-bb
‘italiano.ly’
-d
-b
-dd
-bb
‘norsk.ly’
-iss/-is
-ess/-es
-ississ/-isis
-essess/-eses
‘portugues.ly’
-s
-b
-ss
-bb
‘suomi.ly’
-is
-es
-isis
-eses
‘svenska.ly’
-iss
-ess
-ississ
-essess
‘vlaams.ly’
-k
-b
-kk
-bb
In Dutch, aes is contracted to as, but both forms
are accepted in LilyPond. Similarly, both es and
ees are accepted. This also applies to
aeses / ases and
eeses / eses. Sometimes only these
contracted names are defined in the corresponding language files.
a2 as e es a ases e eses
Some music uses microtones whose alterations are fractions of a ‘normal’ sharp or flat. The note names for quarter-tones defined in the various language files are listed in the following table. Here the prefixes semi- and sesqui- mean ‘half’ and ‘one and a half’, respectively. For the other languages, no special names have been defined yet.
Language File
semi-sharp
semi-flat
sesqui-sharp
sesqui-flat
‘nederlands.ly’
-ih
-eh
-isih
-eseh
‘arabic.ly’
-sd
-sb
-dsd
-bsb
‘deutsch.ly’
-ih
-eh
-isih
-eseh
‘english.ly’
-qs
-qf
-tqs
-tqf
‘italiano.ly’
-sd
-sb
-dsd
-bsb
‘portugues.ly’
-sqt
-bqt
-stqt
-btqt
See also
Music Glossary: Pitch names.
Snippets: Pitches.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Note names in other languages ] | [ Up : Pitches ] | [ Octave checks > ] | ||
1.1.2 Changing multiple pitches
This section discusses how to modify pitches.
| Octave checks | ||
| Transpose |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Changing multiple pitches ] | [ Up : Changing multiple pitches ] | [ Transpose > ] | ||
Octave checks
In relative mode, it is easy to forget an octave changing mark. Octave checks make such errors easier to find by displaying a warning and correcting the octave if a note is found in an unexpected octave.
To check the octave of a note, specify the absolute octave after
the = symbol. This example will generate a warning
(and change the pitch) because the second note is the absolute
octave d'' instead of d' as indicated by the octave
correction.
\relative c'' {
c2 d='4 d
e2 f
}
The octave of notes may also be checked with the
\octaveCheck controlpitch command.
controlpitch is specified in absolute mode. This checks
that the interval between the previous note and the
controlpitch is within a fourth (i.e., the normal
calculation of relative mode). If this check fails, a warning is
printed, but the previous note is not changed. Future notes are
relative to the controlpitch.
\relative c'' {
c2 d
\octaveCheck c'
e2 f
}
Compare the two bars below. The first and third \octaveCheck
checks fail, but the second one does not fail.
\relative c'' {
c4 f g f
c4
\octaveCheck c'
f
\octaveCheck c'
g
\octaveCheck c'
f
}
See also
Snippets: Pitches.
Internals Reference: RelativeOctaveCheck.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Octave checks ] | [ Up : Changing multiple pitches ] | [ Displaying pitches > ] | ||
Transpose
A music expression can be transposed with \transpose. The
syntax is
\transpose frompitch topitch musicexpr
This means that musicexpr is transposed by the interval between the pitches frompitch and topitch: any note with pitch frompitch is changed to topitch and any other note is transposed by the same interval. Both pitches are entered in absolute mode.
Consider a piece written in the key of D-major. It can be transposed up to E-major; note that the key signature is automatically transposed as well.
\transpose d e {
\relative c' {
\key d \major
d4 fis a d
}
}
If a part written in C (normal concert pitch) is to be played on the A clarinet (for which an A is notated as a C and thus sounds a minor third lower than notated), the appropriate part will be produced with:
\transpose a c' {
\relative c' {
\key c \major
c4 d e g
}
}
Note that we specify \key c \major explicitly. If we
do not specify a key signature, the notes will be transposed but
no key signature will be printed.
\transpose distinguishes between enharmonic pitches: both
\transpose c cis or \transpose c des will
transpose up a semitone. The first version will print sharps and
the notes will remain on the same scale step, the second version
will print flats on the scale step above.
music = \relative c' { c d e f }
\new Staff {
\transpose c cis { \music }
\transpose c des { \music }
}
\transpose may also be used in a different way, to input
written notes for a transposing instrument. The previous examples
show how to enter pitches in C (or concert pitch) and
typeset them for a transposing instrument, but the opposite is
also possible if you for example have a set of instrumental parts
and want to print a conductor’s score. For example, when entering
music for a B-flat trumpet that begins on a notated E (concert D),
one would write:
musicInBflat = { e4 … }
\transpose c bes, \musicInBflat
To print this music in F (e.g., rearranging to a French horn) you
could wrap the existing music with another \transpose:
musicInBflat = { e4 … }
\transpose f c' { \transpose c bes, \musicInBflat }
For more information about transposing instruments, see Instrument transpositions.
Selected Snippets
Transposing pitches with minimum accidentals ("Smart" transpose)
This example uses some Scheme code to enforce enharmonic modifications for notes in order to have the minimum number of accidentals. In this case, the following rules apply:
Double accidentals should be removed
B sharp -> C
E sharp -> F
C flat -> B
F flat -> E
In this manner, the most natural enharmonic notes are chosen.
#(define (naturalize-pitch p)
(let ((o (ly:pitch-octave p))
(a (* 4 (ly:pitch-alteration p)))
;; alteration, a, in quarter tone steps,
;; for historical reasons
(n (ly:pitch-notename p)))
(cond
((and (> a 1) (or (eq? n 6) (eq? n 2)))
(set! a (- a 2))
(set! n (+ n 1)))
((and (< a -1) (or (eq? n 0) (eq? n 3)))
(set! a (+ a 2))
(set! n (- n 1))))
(cond
((> a 2) (set! a (- a 4)) (set! n (+ n 1)))
((< a -2) (set! a (+ a 4)) (set! n (- n 1))))
(if (< n 0) (begin (set! o (- o 1)) (set! n (+ n 7))))
(if (> n 6) (begin (set! o (+ o 1)) (set! n (- n 7))))
(ly:make-pitch o n (/ a 4))))
#(define (naturalize music)
(let ((es (ly:music-property music 'elements))
(e (ly:music-property music 'element))
(p (ly:music-property music 'pitch)))
(if (pair? es)
(ly:music-set-property!
music 'elements
(map (lambda (x) (naturalize x)) es)))
(if (ly:music? e)
(ly:music-set-property!
music 'element
(naturalize e)))
(if (ly:pitch? p)
(begin
(set! p (naturalize-pitch p))
(ly:music-set-property! music 'pitch p)))
music))
naturalizeMusic =
#(define-music-function (parser location m)
(ly:music?)
(naturalize m))
music = \relative c' { c4 d e g }
\score {
\new Staff {
\transpose c ais { \music }
\naturalizeMusic \transpose c ais { \music }
\transpose c deses { \music }
\naturalizeMusic \transpose c deses { \music }
}
\layout { }
}
See also
Notation Reference: Instrument transpositions.
Snippets: Pitches.
Internals Reference: TransposedMusic.
Known issues and warnings
The relative conversion will not affect \transpose,
\chordmode or \relative sections in its argument.
To use relative mode within transposed music, an additional
\relative must be placed inside \transpose.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Transpose ] | [ Up : Pitches ] | [ Clef > ] | ||
1.1.3 Displaying pitches
This section discusses how to alter the output of pitches.
| Clef | ||
| Key signature | ||
| Ottava brackets | ||
| Instrument transpositions | ||
| Automatic accidentals | ||
| Ambitus |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Displaying pitches ] | [ Up : Displaying pitches ] | [ Key signature > ] | ||
Clef
The clef may be altered. Middle C is shown in every example.
\clef treble c2 c \clef alto c2 c \clef tenor c2 c \clef bass c2 c
Other clefs include:
\clef french c2 c \clef soprano c2 c \clef mezzosoprano c2 c \clef baritone c2 c \break \clef varbaritone c2 c \clef subbass c2 c \clef percussion c2 c \clef tab c2 c
Further supported clefs are described under Mensural clefs and Gregorian clefs.
By adding _8 or ^8 to the clef name, the
clef is transposed one octave down or up, respectively,
and _15 and ^15 transpose by two octaves.
The clef name must be enclosed in quotes when it contains
underscores or digits.
\clef treble c2 c \clef "treble_8" c2 c \clef "bass^15" c2 c
Selected Snippets
Tweaking clef properties
The command \clef "treble_8" is equivalent to setting
clefGlyph, clefPosition (which controls the vertical
position of the clef), middleCPosition and
clefOctavation. A clef is printed when any of the properties
except middleCPosition are changed.
Note that changing the glyph, the position of the clef, or the
octavation does not in itself change the position of subsequent notes
on the staff: the position of middle C must also be specified to do
this. The positional parameters are relative to the staff center line,
positive numbers displacing upwards, counting one for each line and
space. The clefOctavation value would normally be set to 7, -7,
15 or -15, but other values are valid.
When a clef change takes place at a line break the new clef symbol is
printed at both the end of the previous line and the beginning of the
new line by default. If the warning clef at the end of the previous
line is not required it can be suppressed by setting the Staff
property explicitClefVisibility to the value
end-of-line-invisible. The default behavior can be recovered
with \unset Staff.explicitClefVisibility.
The following examples show the possibilities when setting these properties manually. On the first line, the manual changes preserve the standard relative positioning of clefs and notes, whereas on the second line, they do not.
\layout { ragged-right = ##t }
{
% The default treble clef
c'1
% The standard bass clef
\set Staff.clefGlyph = #"clefs.F"
\set Staff.clefPosition = #2
\set Staff.middleCPosition = #6
c'1
% The baritone clef
\set Staff.clefGlyph = #"clefs.C"
\set Staff.clefPosition = #4
\set Staff.middleCPosition = #4
c'1
% The standard choral tenor clef
\set Staff.clefGlyph = #"clefs.G"
\set Staff.clefPosition = #-2
\set Staff.clefOctavation = #-7
\set Staff.middleCPosition = #1
c'1
% A non-standard clef
\set Staff.clefPosition = #0
\set Staff.clefOctavation = #0
\set Staff.middleCPosition = #-4
c'1 \break
% The following clef changes do not preserve
% the normal relationship between notes and clefs:
\set Staff.clefGlyph = #"clefs.F"
\set Staff.clefPosition = #2
c'1
\set Staff.clefGlyph = #"clefs.G"
c'1
\set Staff.clefGlyph = #"clefs.C"
c'1
\set Staff.clefOctavation = #7
c'1
\set Staff.clefOctavation = #0
\set Staff.clefPosition = #0
c'1
% Return to the normal clef:
\set Staff.middleCPosition = #0
c'1
}
See also
Notation Reference: Mensural clefs, Gregorian clefs.
Snippets: Pitches.
Internals Reference: Clef_engraver, Clef, OctavateEight, clef-interface.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Clef ] | [ Up : Displaying pitches ] | [ Ottava brackets > ] | ||
Key signature
|
Note: New users are sometimes confused about accidentals and
key signatures. In LilyPond, note names are the raw input; key
signatures and clefs determine how this raw input is displayed.
An unaltered note like |
The key signature indicates the tonality in which a piece is played. It is denoted by a set of alterations (flats or sharps) at the start of the staff. The key signature may be altered:
\key pitch mode
Here, mode should be \major or \minor to get a
key signature of pitch-major or pitch-minor,
respectively. You may also use the standard mode names, also
called church modes: \ionian, \dorian,
\phrygian, \lydian, \mixolydian,
\aeolian, and \locrian.
\key g \major fis1 f fis
Selected Snippets
Preventing natural signs from being printed when the key signature changes
When the key signature changes, natural signs are automatically printed
to cancel any accidentals from previous key signatures. This may be
prevented by setting to "false" the printKeyCancellation
property in the Staff context.
\relative c' {
\key d \major
a4 b cis d
\key g \minor
a4 bes c d
\set Staff.printKeyCancellation = ##f
\key d \major
a4 b cis d
\key g \minor
a4 bes c d
}
Non-traditional key signatures
The commonly used \key command sets the keySignature
property, in the Staff context.
To create non-standard key signatures, set this property directly. The format of this command is a list:
\set Staff.keySignature = #`(((octave . step) . alter) ((octave
. step) . alter) ...) where, for each element in the list,
octave specifies the octave (0 being the octave from middle C to
the B above), step specifies the note within the octave (0 means
C and 6 means B), and alter is ,SHARP ,FLAT ,DOUBLE-SHARP
etc. (Note the leading comma.) The accidentals in the key signature
will appear in the reverse order to that in which they are specified.
Alternatively, for each item in the list, using the more concise format
(step . alter) specifies that the same alteration should hold in
all octaves.
For microtonal scales where a "sharp" is not 100 cents, alter
refers to the alteration as a proportion of a 200-cent whole tone.
Here is an example of a possible key signature for generating a whole-tone scale:
\relative c' {
\set Staff.keySignature = #`(((0 . 3) . ,SHARP)
((0 . 5) . ,FLAT)
((0 . 6) . ,FLAT))
c4 d e fis
aes4 bes c2
}
See also
Music Glossary: church mode, scordatura.
Learning Manual: Accidentals and key signatures.
Snippets: Pitches.
Internals Reference: KeyChangeEvent, Key_engraver, Key_performer, KeyCancellation, KeySignature, key-cancellation-interface, key-signature-interface.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Key signature ] | [ Up : Displaying pitches ] | [ Instrument transpositions > ] | ||
Ottava brackets
Ottava brackets introduce an extra transposition of an octave for the staff:
a'2 b \ottava #1 a b \ottava #0 a b
The ottava function also takes -1 (for 8va bassa),
2 (for 15ma), and -2 (for 15ma bassa) as arguments.
Selected Snippets
Ottava text
Internally, \ottava sets the properties ottavation (for
example, to "8va" or "8vb") and
middleCPosition. To override the text of the bracket, set
ottavation after invoking \ottava.
{
\ottava #1
\set Staff.ottavation = #"8"
c''1
\ottava #0
c'1
\ottava #1
\set Staff.ottavation = #"Text"
c''1
}
See also
Music Glossary: octavation.
Snippets: Pitches.
Internals Reference: Ottava_spanner_engraver, OttavaBracket, ottava-bracket-interface.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Ottava brackets ] | [ Up : Displaying pitches ] | [ Automatic accidentals > ] | ||
Instrument transpositions
When typesetting scores that involve transposing instruments, some parts can be typeset in a different pitch than the concert pitch. In these cases, the key of the transposing instrument should be specified; otherwise the MIDI output and cues in other parts will produce incorrect pitches. For more information about quotations, see Quoting other voices.
\transposition pitch
The pitch to use for \transposition should correspond to
the real sound heard when a c' written on the staff is
played by the transposing instrument. This pitch is entered in
absolute mode, so an instrument that produces a real sound which
is one tone higher than the printed music should use
\transposition d'. \transposition should
only be used if the pitches are not being entered in
concert pitch.
Here are a few notes for violin and B-flat clarinet where the parts have been entered using the notes and key as they appear in each part of the conductor’s score. The two instruments are playing in unison.
\new GrandStaff <<
\new Staff = "violin" {
\relative c'' {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Vln"
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"violin"
% not strictly necessary, but a good reminder
\transposition c'
\key c \major
g4( c8) r c r c4
}
}
\new Staff = "clarinet" {
\relative c'' {
\set Staff.instrumentName = \markup { Cl (B\flat) }
\set Staff.midiInstrument = #"clarinet"
\transposition bes
\key d \major
a4( d8) r d r d4
}
}
>>
The \transposition may be changed during a piece. For
example, a clarinetist may switch from an A clarinet to a B-flat
clarinet.
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Cl (A)"
\key a \major
\transposition a
c d e f
\textLengthOn
s1*0^\markup { Switch to B\flat clarinet }
R1
\key bes \major
\transposition bes
c2 g
See also
Music Glossary: concert pitch, transposing instrument.
Notation Reference: Quoting other voices, Transpose.
Snippets: Pitches.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Instrument transpositions ] | [ Up : Displaying pitches ] | [ Ambitus > ] | ||
Automatic accidentals
There are many different conventions on how to typeset accidentals. LilyPond provides a function to specify which accidental style to use. This function is called as follows:
\new Staff <<
#(set-accidental-style 'voice)
{ … }
>>
The accidental style applies to the current Staff by
default (with the exception of the styles piano and
piano-cautionary, which are explained below). Optionally,
the function can take a second argument that determines in which
scope the style should be changed. For example, to use the same
style in all staves of the current StaffGroup, use:
#(set-accidental-style 'voice 'StaffGroup)
The following accidental styles are supported. To demonstrate each style, we use the following example:
musicA = {
<<
\relative c' {
cis'8 fis, d'4 <a cis>8 f bis4 |
cis2. <c, g'>4 |
}
\\
\relative c' {
ais'2 cis, |
fis8 b a4 cis2 |
}
>>
}
musicB = {
\clef bass
\new Voice {
\voiceTwo \relative c' {
<fis, a cis>4
\change Staff = up
cis'
\change Staff = down
<fis, a>
\change Staff = up
dis' |
\change Staff = down
<fis, a cis>4 gis <f a d>2 |
}
}
}
\new PianoStaff {
<<
\context Staff = "up" {
#(set-accidental-style 'default)
\musicA
}
\context Staff = "down" {
#(set-accidental-style 'default)
\musicB
}
>>
}
Note that the last lines of this example can be replaced by the following, as long as the same accidental style should be used in both staves.
\new PianoStaff {
<<
\context Staff = "up" {
%%% change the next line as desired:
#(set-accidental-style 'default 'Score)
\musicA
}
\context Staff = "down" {
\musicB
}
>>
}
-
default -
This is the default typesetting behavior. It corresponds to eighteenth-century common practice: accidentals are remembered to the end of the measure in which they occur and only in their own octave. Thus, in the example below, no natural signs are printed before the
bin the second measure or the lastc: -
voice -
The normal behavior is to remember the accidentals at
Staff-level. In this style, however, accidentals are typeset individually for each voice. Apart from that, the rule is similar todefault.As a result, accidentals from one voice do not get canceled in other voices, which is often an unwanted result: in the following example, it is hard to determine whether the second
ashould be played natural or sharp. Thevoiceoption should therefore be used only if the voices are to be read solely by individual musicians. If the staff is to be used by one musician (e.g., a conductor or in a piano score) thenmodernormodern-cautionaryshould be used instead. -
modern -
This rule corresponds to the common practice in the twentieth century. It prints the same accidentals as
default, with two exceptions that serve to avoid ambiguity: after temporary accidentals, cancellation marks are printed also in the following measure (for notes in the same octave) and, in the same measure, for notes in other octaves. Hence the naturals before theband thecin the second measure of the upper staff: -
modern-cautionary -
This rule is similar to
modern, but the ‘extra’ accidentals (the ones not typeset bydefault) are typeset as cautionary accidentals. They are by default printed with parentheses, but they can also be printed in reduced size by defining thecautionary-styleproperty ofAccidentalSuggestion. -
modern-voice -
This rule is used for multivoice accidentals to be read both by musicians playing one voice and musicians playing all voices. Accidentals are typeset for each voice, but they are canceled across voices in the same
Staff. Hence, theain the last measure is canceled because the previous cancellation was in a different voice, and thedin the lower staff is canceled because of the accidental in a different voice in the previous measure: -
modern-voice-cautionary -
This rule is the same as
modern-voice, but with the extra accidentals (the ones not typeset byvoice) typeset as cautionaries. Even though all accidentals typeset bydefaultare typeset with this rule, some of them are typeset as cautionaries. -
piano -
This rule reflects twentieth-century practice for piano notation. Its behavior is very similar to
modernstyle, but here accidentals also get canceled across the staves in the sameGrandStafforPianoStaff, hence all the cancellations of the final notes.This accidental style applies to the current
GrandStafforPianoStaffby default. -
piano-cautionary -
This is the same as
pianobut with the extra accidentals typeset as cautionaries. -
neo-modern -
This rule reproduces a common practice in contemporary music: accidentals are printed like with
modern, but they are printed again if the same note appears later in the same measure – except if the note is immediately repeated. -
neo-modern-cautionary -
This rule is similar to
neo-modern, but the extra accidentals are printed as cautionary accidentals. -
dodecaphonic -
This rule reflects a practice introduced by composers at the beginning of the 20th century, in an attempt to abolish the hierarchy between natural and non-natural notes. With this style, every note gets an accidental sign, including natural signs.
-
teaching -
This rule is intended for students, and makes it easy to create scale sheets with automagically created cautionary accidentals. Accidentals are printed like with
modern, but cautionary accidentals are added for all sharp or flat tones specified by the key signature, except if the note is immediately repeated. -
no-reset -
This is the same as
defaultbut with accidentals lasting ‘forever’ and not only within the same measure: -
forget -
This is the opposite of
no-reset: Accidentals are not remembered at all – and hence all accidentals are typeset relative to the key signature, regardless of what came before in the music. Unlikedodecaphonic, this rule never prints any naturals.
Selected Snippets
Dodecaphonic-style accidentals for each note including naturals
In early 20th century works, starting with Schoenberg, Berg and Webern (the "Second" Viennese school), every pitch in the twelve-tone scale has to be regarded as equal, without any hierarchy such as the classical (tonal) degrees. Therefore, these composers print one accidental for each note, even at natural pitches, to emphasize their new approach to music theory and language.
This snippet shows how to achieve such notation rules.
\score {
\new Staff {
#(set-accidental-style 'dodecaphonic)
c'4 dis' cis' cis'
c'4 dis' cis' cis'
c'4 c' dis' des'
}
\layout {
\context {
\Staff
\remove "Key_engraver"
}
}
}
See also
Snippets: Pitches.
Internals Reference: Accidental, Accidental_engraver, GrandStaff and PianoStaff, Staff, AccidentalSuggestion, AccidentalPlacement, accidental-suggestion-interface.
Known issues and warnings
Simultaneous notes are considered to be entered in sequential
mode. This means that in a chord the accidentals are typeset as
if the notes in the chord happen one at a time, in the order in
which they appear in the input file. This is a problem when
accidentals in a chord depend on each other, which does not happen
for the default accidental style. The problem can be solved by
manually inserting ! and ? for the
problematic notes.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Automatic accidentals ] | [ Up : Displaying pitches ] | [ Note heads > ] | ||
Ambitus
The term ambitus (pl. ambitus) denotes a range of pitches for a given voice in a part of music. It may also denote the pitch range that a musical instrument is capable of playing. Ambitus are printed on vocal parts so that performers can easily determine if it matches their capabilities.
Ambitus are denoted at the beginning of a piece near the initial clef. The range is graphically specified by two note heads that represent the lowest and highest pitches. Accidentals are only printed if they are not part of the key signature.
\layout {
\context {
\Voice
\consists "Ambitus_engraver"
}
}
\relative c'' {
aes c e2
cis,1
}
Selected Snippets
Adding ambitus per voice
Ambitus can be added per voice. In this case, the ambitus must be moved manually to prevent collisions.
\new Staff <<
\new Voice \with {
\consists "Ambitus_engraver"
} \relative c'' {
\override Ambitus #'X-offset = #2.0
\voiceOne
c4 a d e
f1
}
\new Voice \with {
\consists "Ambitus_engraver"
} \relative c' {
\voiceTwo
es4 f g as
b1
}
>>
Ambitus with multiple voices
Adding the Ambitus_engraver to the Staff context creates
a single ambitus per staff, even in the case of staves with multiple
voices.
\new Staff \with {
\consists "Ambitus_engraver"
}
<<
\new Voice \relative c'' {
\voiceOne
c4 a d e
f1
}
\new Voice \relative c' {
\voiceTwo
es4 f g as
b1
}
>>
See also
Music Glossary: ambitus.
Snippets: Pitches.
Internals Reference: Ambitus_engraver, Voice, Staff, Ambitus, AmbitusAccidental, AmbitusLine, AmbitusNoteHead, ambitus-interface.
Known issues and warnings
There is no collision handling in the case of multiple per-voice ambitus.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Ambitus ] | [ Up : Pitches ] | [ Special note heads > ] | ||
1.1.4 Note heads
This section suggests ways of altering note heads.
| Special note heads | ||
| Easy notation note heads | ||
| Shape note heads | ||
| Improvisation |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Note heads ] | [ Up : Note heads ] | [ Easy notation note heads > ] | ||
Special note heads
Note heads may be altered:
c4 b a b \override NoteHead #'style = #'cross c4 b a b \revert NoteHead #'style c4 d e f
There is a shorthand for diamond shapes which can only be used inside chords:
<c f\harmonic>2 <d a'\harmonic>4 <c g'\harmonic>
To see all note head styles, see Note head styles.
See also
Snippets: Pitches.
Notation Reference: Note head styles, Chorded notes.
Internals Reference: note-event, Note_heads_engraver, Ledger_line_engraver, NoteHead, LedgerLineSpanner, note-head-interface, ledger-line-spanner-interface.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Special note heads ] | [ Up : Note heads ] | [ Shape note heads > ] | ||
Easy notation note heads
The ‘easy play’ note head includes a note name inside the head. It is used in music for beginners. To make the letters readable, it should be printed in a large font size. To print with a larger font, see Setting the staff size.
#(set-global-staff-size 26)
\relative c' {
\easyHeadsOn
c2 e4 f
g1
\easyHeadsOff
c,1
}
Predefined commands
\easyHeadsOn,
\easyHeadsOff.
See also
Notation Reference: Setting the staff size.
Snippets: Pitches.
Internals Reference: note-event, Note_heads_engraver, NoteHead, note-head-interface.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Easy notation note heads ] | [ Up : Note heads ] | [ Improvisation > ] | ||
Shape note heads
In shape note head notation, the shape of the note head corresponds to the harmonic function of a note in the scale. This notation was popular in nineteenth-century American song books. Shape note heads can be produced:
\aikenHeads c, d e f g a b c \sacredHarpHeads c, d e f g a b c
Shapes are typeset according to the step in the scale, where the
base of the scale is determined by the \key command.
Predefined commands
\aikenHeads,
\sacredHarpHeads.
Selected Snippets
Applying note head styles depending on the step of the scale
The shapeNoteStyles property can be used to define various note
head styles for each step of the scale (as set by the key signature or
the "tonic" property). This property requires a set of symbols, which
can be purely arbitrary (geometrical expressions such as
triangle, cross, and xcircle are allowed) or based
on old American engraving tradition (some latin note names are also
allowed).
That said, to imitate old American song books, there are several
predefined note head styles available through shortcut commands such as
\aikenHeads or \sacredHarpHeads.
This example shows different ways to obtain shape note heads, and demonstrates the ability to transpose a melody without losing the correspondence between harmonic functions and note head styles.
fragment = {
\key c \major
c2 d
e2 f
g2 a
b2 c
}
\score {
\new Staff {
\transpose c d
\relative c' {
\set shapeNoteStyles = #'#(do re mi fa
#f la ti)
\fragment
}
\break
\relative c' {
\set shapeNoteStyles = #'#(cross triangle fa #f
mensural xcircle diamond)
\fragment
}
}
\layout { ragged-right = ##t }
}
To see all note head styles, see Note head styles.
See also
Snippets: Pitches.
Notation Reference: Note head styles.
Internals Reference: note-event, Note_heads_engraver, NoteHead, note-head-interface.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Shape note heads ] | [ Up : Note heads ] | [ Rhythms > ] | ||
Improvisation
Improvisation is sometimes denoted with slashed note heads, where the performer may choose any pitch but should play the specified rhythm. Such note heads can be created:
\new Voice \with {
\consists "Pitch_squash_engraver"
} {
e8 e g a a16( bes) a8 g
\improvisationOn
e8 ~
e2 ~ e8 f4 f8 ~
f2
\improvisationOff
a16( bes) a8 g e
}
Predefined commands
\improvisationOn,
\improvisationOff.
See also
Snippets: Pitches.
Internals Reference: Pitch_squash_engraver, Voice, RhythmicStaff.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Improvisation ] | [ Up : Musical notation ] | [ Writing rhythms > ] | ||
1.2 Rhythms
This section discusses rhythms, rests, durations, beaming and bars.
| 1.2.1 Writing rhythms | ||
| 1.2.2 Writing rests | ||
| 1.2.3 Displaying rhythms | ||
| 1.2.4 Beams | ||
| 1.2.5 Bars | ||
| 1.2.6 Special rhythmic concerns |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Rhythms ] | [ Up : Rhythms ] | [ Durations > ] | ||
1.2.1 Writing rhythms
| Durations | ||
| Tuplets | ||
| Scaling durations | ||
| Ties |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Writing rhythms ] | [ Up : Writing rhythms ] | [ Tuplets > ] | ||
Durations
Durations are designated by numbers and dots. Durations are entered
as their reciprocal values. For example, a quarter note is entered
using a 4 (since it is a 1/4 note), and a half note is entered
using a 2 (since it is a 1/2 note). For notes longer than a
whole you must use the \longa (a double breve) and
\breve commands. Durations as short as 128th notes may be
specified. Shorter values are possible, but only as beamed notes.
\time 8/1 c\longa c\breve c1 c2 c4 c8 c16 c32 c64 c128 c128
Here are the same durations with automatic beaming turned off.
\time 8/1 \autoBeamOff c\longa c\breve c1 c2 c4 c8 c16 c32 c64 c128 c128
A note with the duration of a quadruple breve may be entered with
\maxima, but this is supported only within ancient music
notation. For details, see Ancient notation.
If the duration is omitted, it is set to the previously entered duration. The default for the first note is a quarter note.
a a a2 a a4 a a1 a
To obtain dotted note lengths, place a dot (.) after the
duration. Double-dotted notes are specified by appending two
dots, and so on.
a4 b c4. b8 a4. b4.. c8.
Some durations cannot be represented with just binary durations and dots; they can be represented only by tying two or more notes together. For details, see Ties.
For ways of specifying durations for the syllables of lyrics and ways of aligning lyrics to notes, see Vocal music.
Optionally, notes can be spaced strictly proportionately to their duration. For details of this and other settings which control proportional notation, see Proportional notation.
Dots are normally moved up to avoid staff lines, except in polyphonic situations. Predefined commands are available to force a particular direction manually, for details see Direction and placement.
Predefined commands
\autoBeamOff,
\dotsUp,
\dotsDown,
\dotsNeutral.
See also
Music Glossary: breve, longa, maxima, note value, Duration names notes and rests.
Notation Reference: Automatic beams, Ties, Stems, Writing rhythms, Writing rests, Vocal music, Ancient notation, Proportional notation.
Snippets: Rhythms.
Internals Reference: Dots, DotColumn.
Known issues and warnings
There is no fundamental limit to rest durations (both in terms of longest and shortest), but the number of glyphs is limited: rests from 128th to maxima (8 x whole) may be printed.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Durations ] | [ Up : Writing rhythms ] | [ Scaling durations > ] | ||
Tuplets
Tuplets are made from a music expression by multiplying all the durations with a fraction:
\times fraction { music }
The duration of music will be multiplied by the fraction. The fraction’s denominator will be printed over or under the notes, optionally with a bracket. The most common tuplet is the triplet in which 3 notes have the duration of 2, so the notes are 2/3 of their written length.
a2 \times 2/3 { b4 b b }
c4 c \times 2/3 { b4 a g }
The automatic placement of the tuplet bracket above or below the notes may be overridden manually with predefined commands, for details see Direction and placement.
Tuplets may be nested:
\autoBeamOff
c4 \times 4/5 { f8 e f \times 2/3 { e[ f g] } } f4 |
Modifying nested tuplets which begin at the same musical moment
must be done with \tweak.
To modify the duration of notes without printing a tuplet bracket, see Scaling durations.
Predefined commands
\tupletUp,
\tupletDown,
\tupletNeutral.
Selected Snippets
Entering several tuplets using only one \times command
The property tupletSpannerDuration sets how long each of the
tuplets contained within the brackets after \times should last.
Many consecutive tuplets can then be placed within a single
\times expression, thus saving typing.
In the example, two triplets are shown, while \times was
entered only once.
For more information about make-moment, see "Time
administration".
\relative c' {
\time 2/4
\set tupletSpannerDuration = #(ly:make-moment 1 4)
\times 2/3 { c8 c c c c c }
}
Changing the tuplet number
By default, only the numerator of the tuplet number is printed over the
tuplet bracket, i.e., the denominator of the argument to the
\times command. Alternatively, num:den of the tuplet number may
be printed, or the tuplet number may be suppressed altogether.
\relative c'' {
\times 2/3 { c8 c c }
\times 2/3 { c8 c c }
\override TupletNumber #'text = #tuplet-number::calc-fraction-text
\times 2/3 { c8 c c }
\override TupletNumber #'stencil = ##f
\times 2/3 { c8 c c }
}
Permitting line breaks within beamed tuplets
This artificial example shows how both manual and automatic line breaks may be permitted to within a beamed tuplet. Note that such off-beat tuplets have to be beamed manually.
\layout {
\context {
\Voice
% Permit line breaks within tuplets
\remove "Forbid_line_break_engraver"
% Allow beams to be broken at line breaks
\override Beam #'breakable = ##t
}
}
\relative c'' {
a8
\repeat unfold 5 { \times 2/3 { c[ b a] } }
% Insert a manual line break within a tuplet
\times 2/3 { c[ b \bar "" \break a] }
\repeat unfold 5 { \times 2/3 { c[ b a] } }
c8
}
See also
Music Glossary: triplet, tuplet, polymetric.
Learning Manual: Tweaking methods.
Notation Reference:
Time administration,
Scaling durations,
The \tweak command,
Polymetric notation.
Snippets: Rhythms.
Internals Reference: TupletBracket, TupletNumber, TimeScaledMusic.
Known issues and warnings
When the first note on a staff is a grace note followed by a
tuplet the grace note must be placed before the \times
command to avoid errors. Anywhere else, grace notes may be
placed within tuplet brackets.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Tuplets ] | [ Up : Writing rhythms ] | [ Ties > ] | ||
Scaling durations
You can alter the duration of single notes, rests or chords by a
fraction N/M by appending *N/M (or *N if M
is 1) to the duration. This will not affect the appearance of the
notes or rests produced, but the altered duration will be used in
calculating the position within the measure and setting the duration
in the MIDI output. Multiplying factors may be combined such as
*L*M/N.
In the following example, the first three notes take up exactly two beats, but no triplet bracket is printed.
\time 2/4 % Alter durations to triplets a4*2/3 gis4*2/3 a4*2/3 % Normal durations a4 a4 % Double the duration of chord <a d>4*2 % Duration of quarter, appears like sixteenth b16*4 c4
The duration of skip or spacing notes may also be modified by
a multiplier. This is useful for skipping many measures, e.g.,
s1*23.
Longer stretches of music may be compressed by a fraction in the same way, as if every note, chord or rest had the fraction as a multiplier. This leaves the appearance of the music unchanged but the internal duration of the notes will be multiplied by the fraction num/den. The spaces around the dot are required. Here is an example showing how music can be compressed and expanded:
\time 2/4
% Normal durations
<c a>4 c8 a
% Scale music by *2/3
\scaleDurations #'(2 . 3) {
<c a f>4. c8 a f
}
% Scale music by *2
\scaleDurations #'(2 . 1) {
<c' a>4 c8 b
}
One application of this command is in polymetric notation, see Polymetric notation.
See also
Notation Reference: Tuplets, Invisible rests, Polymetric notation.
Snippets: Rhythms.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Scaling durations ] | [ Up : Writing rhythms ] | [ Writing rests > ] | ||
Ties
A tie connects two adjacent note heads of the same pitch. The tie in effect extends the duration of a note.
|
Note: Ties should not be confused with slurs, which indicate articulation, or phrasing slurs, which indicate musical phrasing. A tie is just a way of extending a note duration, similar to the augmentation dot. |
A tie is entered using the tilde symbol ~
a2 ~ a
Ties are used either when the note crosses a bar line, or when dots cannot be used to denote the rhythm. Ties should also be used when note values cross larger subdivisions of the measure:
\relative c' {
r8 c8 ~ c2 r4 |
r8^"not" c2 ~ c8 r4
}
If you need to tie many notes across bar lines, it may be easier to use automatic note splitting, see Automatic note splitting. This mechanism automatically splits long notes, and ties them across bar lines.
When a tie is applied to a chord, all note heads whose pitches match are connected. When no note heads match, no ties will be created. Chords may be partially tied by placing the tie inside the chord.
<c e g> ~ <c e g> <c~ e g~ b> <c e g b>
When a second alternative of a repeat starts with a tied note, you have to specify the repeated tie as follows:
\repeat volta 2 { c g <c e>2 ~ }
\alternative {
% First alternative: following note is tied normally
{ <c e>2. r4 }
% Second alternative: following note has a repeated tie
{ <c e>2\repeatTie d4 c } }
L.v. ties (laissez vibrer) indicate that notes must not be damped at the end. It is used in notation for piano, harp and other string and percussion instruments. They can be entered as follows:
<c f g>1\laissezVibrer
The vertical placement of ties may be controlled, see Predefined commands, or for details, see Direction and placement.
Solid, dotted or dashed ties may be specified, see Predefined commands.
Predefined commands
\tieUp,
\tieDown,
\tieNeutral,
\tieDotted,
\tieDashed,
\tieSolid.
Selected Snippets
Using ties with arpeggios
Ties are sometimes used to write out arpeggios. In this case, two tied
notes need not be consecutive. This can be achieved by setting the
tieWaitForNote property to #t. The same feature is also
useful, for example, to tie a tremolo to a chord, but in principle, it
can also be used for ordinary consecutive notes.
\relative c' {
\set tieWaitForNote = ##t
\grace { c16[ ~ e ~ g] ~ } <c, e g>2
\repeat tremolo 8 { c32 ~ c' ~ } <c c,>1
e8 ~ c ~ a ~ f ~ <e' c a f>2
\tieUp
c8 ~ a
\tieDown
\tieDotted
g8 ~ c g2
}
Engraving ties manually
Ties may be engraved manually by changing the tie-configuration
property of the TieColumn object. The first number indicates the
distance from the center of the staff in staff-spaces, and the second
number indicates the direction (1 = up, -1 = down).
\relative c' {
<c e g>2 ~ <c e g>
\override TieColumn #'tie-configuration =
#'((0.0 . 1) (-2.0 . 1) (-4.0 . 1))
<c e g> ~ <c e g>
}
See also
Music Glossary: tie, laissez vibrer.
Notation Reference: Automatic note splitting.
Snippets: Rhythms.
Internals Reference: LaissezVibrerTie, LaissezVibrerTieColumn, TieColumn, Tie.
Known issues and warnings
Switching staves when a tie is active will not produce a slanted tie.
Changing clefs or octavations during a tie is not really well-defined. In these cases, a slur may be preferable.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Ties ] | [ Up : Rhythms ] | [ Rests > ] | ||
1.2.2 Writing rests
Rests are entered as part of the music in music expressions.
| Rests | ||
| Invisible rests | ||
| Full measure rests |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Writing rests ] | [ Up : Writing rests ] | [ Invisible rests > ] | ||
Rests
Rests are entered like notes with the note name r.
Durations longer than a whole rest use the predefined
commands shown:
\new Staff {
% These two lines are just to prettify this example
\time 16/1
\override Staff.TimeSignature #'stencil = ##f
% Print a maxima rest, equal to four breves
r\maxima
% Print a longa rest, equal to two breves
r\longa
% Print a breve rest
r\breve
r1 r2 r4 r8 r16 r32 r64 r128
}
Whole measure rests, centered in the middle of the measure, must be entered as multi-measure rests. They can be used for a single measure as well as many measures and are discussed in Full measure rests.
To explicitly specify a rest’s vertical position, write a note
followed by \rest. A rest of the duration of the note will
be placed at the staff position where the note would appear. This
allows for precise manual formatting of polyphonic music, since the
automatic rest collision formatter will not move these rests.
a4\rest d4\rest
Selected Snippets
Rest styles
Rests may be used in various styles.
\layout {
indent = 0.0
\context {
\Staff
\remove "Time_signature_engraver"
}
}
\new Staff \relative c {
\cadenzaOn
\override Staff.Rest #'style = #'mensural
r\maxima^\markup \typewriter { mensural }
r\longa r\breve r1 r2 r4 r8 r16 s32 s64 s128 s128
\bar ""
\override Staff.Rest #'style = #'neomensural
r\maxima^\markup \typewriter { neomensural }
r\longa r\breve r1 r2 r4 r8 r16 s32 s64 s128 s128
\bar ""
\override Staff.Rest #'style = #'classical
r\maxima^\markup \typewriter { classical }
r\longa r\breve r1 r2 r4 r8 r16 r32 r64 r128 s128
\bar ""
\override Staff.Rest #'style = #'default
r\maxima^\markup \typewriter { default }
r\longa r\breve r1 r2 r4 r8 r16 r32 r64 r128 s128
}
See also
Music Glossary: breve, longa, maxima.
Notation Reference: Full measure rests.
Snippets: Rhythms.
Internals Reference: Rest.
Known issues and warnings
There is no fundamental limit to rest durations (both in terms of longest and shortest), but the number of glyphs is limited: there are rests from 128th to maxima (8 x whole).
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Rests ] | [ Up : Writing rests ] | [ Full measure rests > ] | ||
Invisible rests
An invisible rest (also called a ‘spacer rest’) can be entered
like a note with the note name s:
c4 c s c s2 c
Spacer rests are available only in note mode and chord mode. In
other situations, for example, when entering lyrics, \skip
is used to skip a musical moment. \skip requires an
explicit duration.
<<
{
a2 \skip2 a2 a2
}
\new Lyrics {
\lyricmode {
foo2 \skip 1 bla2
}
}
>>
A spacer rest implicitly causes Staff and Voice
contexts to be created if none exist, just like notes and rests
do:
s1 s s
\skip simply skips musical time; it creates no output of
any kind.
% This is valid input, but does nothing \skip 1 \skip1 \skip 1
See also
Snippets: Rhythms.
Internals Reference: SkipMusic
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Invisible rests ] | [ Up : Writing rests ] | [ Displaying rhythms > ] | ||
Full measure rests
Rests for one or more full measures are entered like notes with
the note name uppercase R:
% Rest measures contracted to single measure \compressFullBarRests R1*4 R1*24 R1*4 b2^"Tutti" b4 a4
The duration of full-measure rests is identical to the duration notation used for notes. The duration in a multi-measure rest must always be an integral number of measure-lengths, so augmentation dots or fractions must often be used:
\compressFullBarRests \time 2/4 R1 | R2 | \time 3/4 R2. | R2.*2 | \time 13/8 R1*13/8 | R1*13/8*12 | \time 10/8 R4*5*4 |
A full-measure rest is printed as either a whole or breve rest, centered in the measure, depending on the time signature.
\time 4/4 R1 | \time 6/4 R1*3/2 | \time 8/4 R1*2 |
By default a multi-measure rest is expanded in the printed score to show all the rest measures explicitly. Alternatively, a multi-measure rest can be shown as a single measure containing a multi-measure rest symbol, with the number of measures of rest printed above the measure:
% Default behavior \time 3/4 r2. | R2.*2 | \time 2/4 R2 | \time 4/4 % Rest measures contracted to single measure \compressFullBarRests r1 | R1*17 | R1*4 | % Rest measures expanded \expandFullBarRests \time 3/4 R2.*2 |
Markups can be added to multi-measure rests.
The predefined command \fermataMarkup
is provided for adding fermatas.
\compressFullBarRests
\time 3/4
R2.*10^\markup { \italic "ad lib." }
R2.^\fermataMarkup
|
Note: Markups attached to a multi-measure rest are
objects of type |
% This fails, as the wrong object name is specified \override TextScript #'padding = #5 R1^"wrong" % This is correct and works \override MultiMeasureRestText #'padding = #5 R1^"right"
When a multi-measure rest immediately follows a \partial
setting, resulting bar-check warnings may not be displayed.
Predefined commands
\textLengthOn,
\textLengthOff,
\fermataMarkup,
\compressFullBarRests,
\expandFullBarRests.
Selected Snippets
Changing form of multi-measure rests
If there are ten or fewer measures of rests, a series of longa and
breve rests (called in German "Kirchenpausen" - church rests) is
printed within the staff; otherwise a simple line is shown. This
default number of ten may be changed by overriding the
expand-limit property.
\relative c'' {
\compressFullBarRests
R1*2 | R1*5 | R1*9
\override MultiMeasureRest #'expand-limit = #3
R1*2 | R1*5 | R1*9
}
Positioning multi-measure rests
Unlike ordinary rests, there is no predefined command to change the staff position of a multi-measure rest symbol of either form by attaching it to a note. However, in polyphonic music multi-measure rests in odd-numbered and even-numbered voices are vertically separated. The positioning of multi-measure rests can be controlled as follows:
\relative c'' {
% Multi-measure rests by default are set under the fourth line
R1
% They can be moved with an override
\override MultiMeasureRest #'staff-position = #-2
R1
% A value of 0 is the default position;
% the following trick moves the rest to the center line
\override MultiMeasureRest #'staff-position = #-0.01
R1
% Multi-measure rests in odd-numbered voices are under the top line
<< { R1 } \\ { a1 } >>
% Multi-measure rests in even-numbered voices are under the bottom line
<< { c1 } \\ { R1 } >>
% They remain separated even in empty measures
<< { R1 } \\ { R1 } >>
% This brings them together even though there are two voices
\compressFullBarRests
<<
\revert MultiMeasureRest #'staff-position
{ R1*3 }
\\
\revert MultiMeasureRest #'staff-position
{ R1*3 }
>>
}
Multi-measure rest markup
Markups attached to a multi-measure rest will be centered above or below it. Long markups attached to multi-measure rests do not cause the measure to expand. To expand a multi-measure rest to fit the markup, use a spacer rest with an attached markup before the multi-measure rest.
Note that the spacer rest causes a bar line to be inserted. Text attached to a spacer rest in this way is left-aligned to the position where the note would be placed in the measure, but if the measure length is determined by the length of the text, the text will appear to be centered.
\relative c' {
\compressFullBarRests
\textLengthOn
s1*0^\markup { [MAJOR GENERAL] }
R1*19
s1*0_\markup { \italic { Cue: ... it is yours } }
s1*0^\markup { A }
R1*30^\markup { [MABEL] }
\textLengthOff
c4^\markup { CHORUS } d f c
}
See also
Music Glossary: multi-measure rest.
Notation Reference: Durations, Text, Formatting text, Text scripts.
Snippets: Rhythms.
Internals Reference: MultiMeasureRest, MultiMeasureRestNumber, MultiMeasureRestText.
Known issues and warnings
If an attempt is made to use fingerings (e.g.,
R1*10-4) to put numbers over multi-measure rests, the
fingering numeral (4) may collide with the bar counter
numeral (10).
There is no way to automatically condense multiple ordinary rests into a single multi-measure rest.
Multi-measure rests do not take part in rest collisions.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Full measure rests ] | [ Up : Rhythms ] | [ Time signature > ] | ||
1.2.3 Displaying rhythms
| Time signature | ||
| Upbeats | ||
| Unmetered music | ||
| Polymetric notation | ||
| Automatic note splitting | ||
| Showing melody rhythms |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Displaying rhythms ] | [ Up : Displaying rhythms ] | [ Upbeats > ] | ||
Time signature
The time signature is set as follows:
\time 2/4 c2 \time 3/4 c2.
Time signatures are printed at the beginning of a piece and whenever the time signature changes. If a change takes place at the end of a line a warning time signature sign is printed there. This default behavior may be changed, see Visibility of objects.
\time 2/4 c2 c \break c c \break \time 4/4 c c c c
The time signature symbol that is used in 2/2 and 4/4 time can be changed to a numeric style:
% Default style \time 4/4 c1 \time 2/2 c1 % Change to numeric style \numericTimeSignature \time 4/4 c1 \time 2/2 c1 % Revert to default style \defaultTimeSignature \time 4/4 c1 \time 2/2 c1
Mensural time signatures are covered in Mensural time signatures.
Predefined commands
\numericTimeSignature,
\defaultTimeSignature.
Selected Snippets
Changing the time signature without affecting the beaming
The \time command sets the properties
timeSignatureFraction, beatLength, beatGrouping
and measureLength in the Timing context, which is
normally aliased to Score. Changing the value of
timeSignatureFraction causes the new time signature symbol to be
printed without changing any of the other properties:
\relative c'' {
\time 3/4
a16 a a a a a a a a a a a
% Change time signature symbol but keep 3/4 beaming
% due to unchanged underlying time signature
\set Score.timeSignatureFraction = #'(12 . 16)
a16 a a a a a a a a a a a
\time 12/16
% Lose 3/4 beaming now \time has been changed
a16 a a a a a a a a a a a
}
Compound time signatures
Odd 20th century time signatures (such as "5/8") can often be played as compound time signatures (e.g. "3/8 + 2/8"), which combine two or more inequal metrics. LilyPond can make such music quite easy to read and play, by explicitly printing the compound time signatures and adapting the automatic beaming behavior. (Graphic measure grouping indications can also be added; see the appropriate snippet in this database.)
#(define ((compound-time one two num) grob)
(grob-interpret-markup grob
(markup #:override '(baseline-skip . 0) #:number
(#:line (
(#:column (one num))
#:vcenter "+"
(#:column (two num)))))))
\relative c' {
\override Staff.TimeSignature #'stencil = #(compound-time "2" "3" "8")
\time 5/8
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end 1 8 5 8) 1 4)
c8 d e fis gis
c8 fis, gis e d
c8 d e4 gis8
}
See also
Music Glossary: time signature
Notation Reference: Mensural time signatures, Time administration.
Snippets: Rhythms.
Internals Reference: TimeSignature, Timing_translator.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Time signature ] | [ Up : Displaying rhythms ] | [ Unmetered music > ] | ||
Upbeats
Partial or pick-up measures, such as an anacrusis or upbeat, are
entered using the \partial command, with the syntax
\partial duration
where duration is the rhythmic length of the interval
before the start of the first complete measure:
\partial 4 e4 | a2. c,4 |
The partial measure can be any duration less than a full measure:
\partial 8*3 c8 d e | a2. c,4 |
Internally, this is translated into
\set Timing.measurePosition = -duration
The property measurePosition contains a rational number
indicating how much of the measure has passed at this point. Note
that this is set to a negative number by the \partial
command: i.e., \partial 4 is internally translated to
-4, meaning “there is a quarter note left in the measure.”
See also
Music Glossary: anacrusis.
Notation Reference: Grace notes.
Snippets: Rhythms.
Internal Reference: Timing_translator.
Known issues and warnings
The \partial command is intended to be used only at the
beginning of a piece. If you use it after the beginning, some
odd warnings may occur.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Upbeats ] | [ Up : Displaying rhythms ] | [ Polymetric notation > ] | ||
Unmetered music
Bar lines and bar numbers are calculated automatically. For
unmetered music (some cadenzas, for example), this is not desirable.
To turn off automatic calculation of bar lines and bar numbers,
use the command \cadenzaOn, and use \cadenzaOff
to turn them on again.
c4 d e d \cadenzaOn c4 c d8 d d f4 g4. \cadenzaOff \bar "|" d4 e d c
Bar numbering is resumed at the end of the cadenza as if the cadenza were not there:
% Show all bar numbers \override Score.BarNumber #'break-visibility = #all-visible c4 d e d \cadenzaOn c4 c d8 d d f4 g4. \cadenzaOff \bar "|" d4 e d c
Predefined commands
\cadenzaOn,
\cadenzaOff.
See also
Music Glossary: cadenza.
Notation Reference: Visibility of objects.
Snippets: Rhythms.
Known issues and warnings
LilyPond will insert line breaks and page breaks only at a bar line. Unless the unmetered music ends before the end of the staff line, you will need to insert invisible bar lines with
\bar ""
to indicate where breaks can occur.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Unmetered music ] | [ Up : Displaying rhythms ] | [ Automatic note splitting > ] | ||
Polymetric notation
Polymetric notation is supported, either explicitly or by modifying the visible time signature symbol and scaling the note durations.
Staves with different time signatures, equal measure lengths
This notation can be created by setting a common time signature
for each staff but replacing the symbol manually by setting
timeSignatureFraction to the desired fraction and scaling
the printed durations in each staff to the common time
signature; see Time signature. The scaling is done with
\scaleDurations, which is used in a similar way to
\times, but does not create a tuplet bracket; see
Scaling durations.
In this example, music with the time signatures of 3/4, 9/8, and 10/8 are used in parallel. In the second staff, shown durations are multiplied by 2/3, as 2/3 * 9/8 = 3/4, and in the third staff, shown durations are multiplied by 3/5, as 3/5 * 10/8 = 3/4. It will often be necessary to insert beams manually, as the duration scaling affects the autobeaming rules.
\relative c' <<
\new Staff {
\time 3/4
c4 c c |
c c c |
}
\new Staff {
\time 3/4
\set Staff.timeSignatureFraction = #'(9 . 8)
\scaleDurations #'(2 . 3)
\repeat unfold 6 { c8[ c c] }
}
\new Staff {
\time 3/4
\set Staff.timeSignatureFraction = #'(10 . 8)
\scaleDurations #'(3 . 5) {
\repeat unfold 2 { c8[ c c] }
\repeat unfold 2 { c8[ c] } |
c4. c4. \times 2/3 { c8[ c c] } c4
}
}
>>
Staves with different time signatures, unequal bar lengths
Each staff can be given its own independent time signature by
moving the Timing_translator and the
Default_bar_line_engraver to the Staff context.
\layout {
\context {
\Score
\remove "Timing_translator"
\remove "Default_bar_line_engraver"
}
\context {
\Staff
\consists "Timing_translator"
\consists "Default_bar_line_engraver"
}
}
% Now each staff has its own time signature.
\relative c' <<
\new Staff {
\time 3/4
c4 c c |
c c c |
}
\new Staff {
\time 2/4
c4 c |
c c |
c c |
}
\new Staff {
\time 3/8
c4. |
c8 c c |
c4. |
c8 c c |
}
>>
Selected Snippets
Compound time signatures
Odd 20th century time signatures (such as "5/8") can often be played as compound time signatures (e.g. "3/8 + 2/8"), which combine two or more inequal metrics. LilyPond can make such music quite easy to read and play, by explicitly printing the compound time signatures and adapting the automatic beaming behavior. (Graphic measure grouping indications can also be added; see the appropriate snippet in this database.)
#(define ((compound-time one two num) grob)
(grob-interpret-markup grob
(markup #:override '(baseline-skip . 0) #:number
(#:line (
(#:column (one num))
#:vcenter "+"
(#:column (two num)))))))
\relative c' {
\override Staff.TimeSignature #'stencil = #(compound-time "2" "3" "8")
\time 5/8
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end 1 8 5 8) 1 4)
c8 d e fis gis
c8 fis, gis e d
c8 d e4 gis8
}
See also
Music Glossary: polymetric, polymetric time signature, meter.
Notation Reference: Time signature, Scaling durations.
Snippets: Rhythms.
Internals Reference: TimeSignature, Timing_translator, Default_bar_line_engraver, Staff.
Known issues and warnings
When using different time signatures in parallel, notes at the same moment will be be placed at the same horizontal location. However, the bar lines in the different staves will cause the note spacing to be less regular in each of the individual staves than would be normal without the different time signatures.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Polymetric notation ] | [ Up : Displaying rhythms ] | [ Showing melody rhythms > ] | ||
Automatic note splitting
Long notes which overrun bar lines can be converted automatically
to tied notes. This is done by replacing the
Note_heads_engraver with the
Completion_heads_engraver. In the following
example, notes crossing the bar lines are split and tied.
\new Voice \with {
\remove "Note_heads_engraver"
\consists "Completion_heads_engraver"
}
{ c2. c8 d4 e f g a b c8 c2 b4 a g16 f4 e d c8. c2 }
This engraver splits all running notes at the bar line, and inserts ties. One of its uses is to debug complex scores: if the measures are not entirely filled, then the ties show exactly how much each measure is off.
See also
Music Glossary: tie
Learning Manual: Engravers explained, Adding and removing engravers.
Snippets: Rhythms.
Internals Reference: Note_heads_engraver, Completion_heads_engraver, Forbid_line_break_engraver.
Known issues and warnings
Not all durations (especially those containing tuplets) can be
represented exactly with normal notes and dots, but the
Completion_heads_engraver will not insert tuplets.
The Completion_heads_engraver only affects notes; it does not
split rests.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Automatic note splitting ] | [ Up : Displaying rhythms ] | [ Beams > ] | ||
Showing melody rhythms
Sometimes you might want to show only the rhythm of a melody. This can be done with the rhythmic staff. All pitches of notes on such a staff are squashed, and the staff itself has a single line
<<
\new RhythmicStaff {
\new Voice = "myRhythm" {
\time 4/4
c4 e8 f g2
r4 g g f
g1
}
}
\new Lyrics {
\lyricsto "myRhythm" {
This is my song
I like to sing
}
}
>>
Guitar chord charts often show the strumming rhythms. This can
be done with the Pitch_squash_engraver and
\improvisationOn.
<<
\new ChordNames {
\chordmode {
c1 f g c
}
}
\new Voice \with {
\consists Pitch_squash_engraver
} \relative c'' {
\improvisationOn
c4 c8 c c4 c8 c
f4 f8 f f4 f8 f
g4 g8 g g4 g8 g
c4 c8 c c4 c8 c
}
>>
Predefined commands
\improvisationOn,
\improvisationOff.
Selected Snippets
Guitar strum rhythms
For guitar music, it is possible to show strum rhythms, along with melody notes, chord names and fret diagrams.
\include "predefined-guitar-fretboards.ly"
<<
\new ChordNames {
\chordmode {
c1 f g c
}
}
\new FretBoards {
\chordmode {
c1 f g c
}
}
\new Voice \with {
\consists "Pitch_squash_engraver"
} {
\relative c'' {
\improvisationOn
c4 c8 c c4 c8 c
f4 f8 f f4 f8 f
g4 g8 g g4 g8 g
c4 c8 c c4 c8 c
}
}
\new Voice = "melody" {
\relative c'' {
c2 e4 e4
f2. r4
g2. a4
e4 c2.
}
}
\new Lyrics {
\lyricsto "melody" {
This is my song.
I like to sing.
}
}
>>
See also
Snippets: Rhythms.
Internals Reference: RhythmicStaff, Pitch_squash_engraver.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Showing melody rhythms ] | [ Up : Rhythms ] | [ Automatic beams > ] | ||
1.2.4 Beams
| Automatic beams | ||
| Setting automatic beam behavior | ||
| Manual beams | ||
| Feathered beams |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Beams ] | [ Up : Beams ] | [ Setting automatic beam behavior > ] | ||
Automatic beams
By default, beams are inserted automatically:
\time 2/4 c8 c c c \time 6/8 c c c c8. c16 c8
If these automatic decisions are not satisfactory, beaming can be entered explicitly; see Manual beams. Beams must also be entered manually in the same way if beams are to be extended over rests.
It is possible
to define beaming patterns that differ from the defaults. The
default beaming rules for most common time signatures are defined
in ‘scm/auto-beam.scm’. If there are no beaming rules
defined for a particular beam’s duration in the time signature being
used, its beaming is controlled by the values of three context
properties, measureLength, beatLength and
beatGrouping. Both the beaming rules and the context
properties can be overridden, see Setting automatic beam behavior.
|
Note: If beams are used to indicate melismata in songs, then automatic
beaming should be switched off with |
Automatic beaming may be turned off and on with
\autoBeamOff and \autoBeamOn commands:
c4 c8 c8. c16 c8. c16 c8 \autoBeamOff c4 c8 c8. c16 c8. \autoBeamOn c16 c8
Predefined commands
\autoBeamOff,
\autoBeamOn.
Selected Snippets
Beams across line breaks
Line breaks are normally forbidden when beams cross bar lines. This behavior can be changed as shown:
\relative c'' {
\override Beam #'breakable = ##t
c8 c[ c] c[ c] c[ c] c[ \break
c8] c[ c] c[ c] c[ c] c
}
Changing beam knee gap
Kneed beams are inserted automatically when a large gap is detected
between the note heads. This behavior can be tuned through the
auto-knee-gap property. A kneed beam is drawn if the gap is
larger than the value of auto-knee-gap plus the width of the
beam object (which depends on the duration of the notes and the slope
of the beam). By default auto-knee-gap is set to 5.5 staff
spaces.
{
f8 f''8 f8 f''8
\override Beam #'auto-knee-gap = #6
f8 f''8 f8 f''8
}
See also
Notation Reference: Manual beams, Setting automatic beam behavior.
Installed Files: ‘scm/auto-beam.scm’.
Snippets: Rhythms.
Internals Reference: Beam.
Known issues and warnings
Automatically kneed cross-staff beams cannot be used together with hidden staves. See Hiding staves.
Beams can collide with note heads and accidentals in other voices
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Automatic beams ] | [ Up : Beams ] | [ Manual beams > ] | ||
Setting automatic beam behavior
The placement of automatic beams is determined by the rules described in Automatic beams. There are two mutually exclusive ways in which these rules may be modified. The first, modifying the grouping of beats, applies to uncommon time signatures, i.e. those for which there are no predefined rules defining the beam end points. The second method, modifying the specification of the beam end points, can be used for any time signature. This second method must be used for those time signatures and beam durations combinations for which beam ending rules are pre-defined, unless these have all been reverted. There are predefined rules for time signatures of 3/2, 3/4, 4/4, 2/4, 4/8, 4/16, 6/8, 9/8 and 12/8.
Modifying the grouping of beats
If there are no beam-ending rules defined for the beam duration of a
particular beam in the time signature in use, its beaming is
controlled by three context properties:
measureLength, beatLength and beatGrouping.
These properties may be set in the Score, Staff or
Voice contexts to delimit their scope. The default values
are set while processing \time commands, so the \set
commands must be placed after all \time commands.
These determine the beaming as follows:
Beams may begin anywhere (unless a beam is already active). Beams
end at a time determined by the values of beatGrouping and
beatLength, as follows:
- If
beatGroupingandbeatLengthare consistent withmeasureLength,beatGroupingis used to determine the end points of beams. - If
beatGroupingandbeatLengthare inconsistent withmeasureLength,beatLengthis used to determine the end points of beams.
|
Note: These three properties become effective for a particular beam only if there are no beam-ending rules predefined for that beam’s duration in the time signature in use, or if these beam-ending rules have all been reverted. |
By default the measureLength and beatLength are
derived from the time signature set by the \time command.
The measureLength is set to be exactly the same length as
the measure length given by the time signature, and the
beatLength is set to be the same as one over the denominator
of the time signature.
The default value of beatGrouping is taken from a table in
‘scm/music-functions.scm’. To find this, see
Other sources of information. It defines the beat
grouping for 5/8, 6/8, 8/8, 9/8 and 12/8 time signatures.
Both measureLength and beatLength are moments,
units of musical duration. A quantity of type moment is
created by the scheme function ly:make-moment. For more
information about this function, see Time administration.
beatGrouping is a list of integers giving the number of
beats in each group.
Selected Snippets
Grouping beats
Beaming patterns may be altered with the beatGrouping property:
\relative c'' {
\time 5/16
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 5 16) 5 16)
\set beatGrouping = #'(2 3)
c8^"(2+3)" c16 c8
\set beatGrouping = #'(3 2)
c8^"(3+2)" c16 c8
}
Specifying context with beatGrouping
By specifying the context, the effect of beatGrouping can be
limited to the context specified, and the values which may have been
set in higher-level contexts can be overridden. The \set
commands must be placed after all \time commands:
\score {
\new Staff <<
\time 7/8
\new Voice {
\relative c'' {
\set Staff.beatGrouping = #'(2 3 2)
a8 a a a a a a
}
}
\new Voice {
\relative c' {
\voiceTwo
\set beatGrouping = #'(1 3 3)
f8 f f f f f f
}
}
>>
}
Using beatLength and beatGrouping
The property measureLength determines where bar lines should be
inserted and, with beatLength and beatGrouping, how
automatic beams should be generated for beam durations and time
signatures for which no beam-ending rules are defined. This example
shows several ways of controlling beaming by setting these properties.
The explanations are shown as comments in the code.
\relative c'' {
\time 3/4
% The default in 3/4 time is to beam in three groups
% each of a quarter note length
a16 a a a a a a a a a a a
\time 12/16
% No auto-beaming is defined for 12/16
a16 a a a a a a a a a a a
\time 3/4
% Change time signature symbol, but retain underlying 3/4 beaming
\set Score.timeSignatureFraction = #'(12 . 16)
a16 a a a a a a a a a a a
% The 3/4 time default grouping of (1 1 1) and beatLength of 1/8
% are not consistent with a measureLength of 3/4, so the beams
% are grouped at beatLength intervals
\set Score.beatLength = #(ly:make-moment 1 8)
a16 a a a a a a a a a a a
% Specify beams in groups of (3 3 2 3) 1/16th notes
% 3+3+2+3=11, and 11*1/16<>3/4, so beatGrouping does not apply,
% and beams are grouped at beatLength (1/16) intervals
\set Score.beatLength = #(ly:make-moment 1 16)
\set Score.beatGrouping = #'(3 3 2 3)
a16 a a a a a a a a a a a
% Specify beams in groups of (3 4 2 3) 1/16th notes
% 3+4+2+3=12, and 12*1/16=3/4, so beatGrouping applies
\set Score.beatLength = #(ly:make-moment 1 16)
\set Score.beatGrouping = #'(3 4 2 3)
a16 a a a a a a a a a a a
}
Sub-dividing beams
The beams of consecutive 16th (or shorter) notes are, by default, not
sub-divided. That is, the three (or more) beams stretch unbroken over
entire groups of notes. This behavior can be modified to sub-divide
the beams into sub-groups by setting the property
subdivideBeams. When set, multiple beams will be sub-divided at
intervals defined by the current value of beatLength by reducing
the multiple beams to just one beam between the sub-groups. Note that
beatLength defaults to one over the denominator of the current
time signature if not set explicitly. It must be set to a fraction
giving the duration of the beam sub-group using the make-moment
function, as shown here:
\relative c'' {
c32[ c c c c c c c]
\set subdivideBeams = ##t
c32[ c c c c c c c]
% Set beam sub-group length to an eighth note
\set beatLength = #(ly:make-moment 1 8)
c32[ c c c c c c c]
% Set beam sub-group length to a sixteenth note
\set beatLength = #(ly:make-moment 1 16)
c32[ c c c c c c c]
}
Conducting signs, measure grouping signs
Options to group beats within a bar are available through the Scheme
function set-time-signature, which takes three arguments: the
number of beats, the beat length, and the internal grouping of beats in
the measure. If the Measure_grouping_engraver is included, the
function will also create MeasureGrouping signs. Such signs
ease reading rhythmically complex modern music. In the example, the
9/8 measure is subdivided in 2, 2, 2 and 3. This is passed to
set-time-signature as the third argument: '(2 2 2 3):
\score {
\relative c'' {
#(set-time-signature 9 8 '(2 2 2 3))
#(revert-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 9 8) 3 8)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end 1 8 9 8) 1 4)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end 1 8 9 8) 2 4)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end 1 8 9 8) 3 4)
g8 g d d g g a( bes g) |
#(set-time-signature 5 8 '(3 2))
a4. g4
}
\layout {
\context {
\Staff
\consists "Measure_grouping_engraver"
}
}
}
Modifying the beam end points
In common time signatures, automatic beams can start on any note
but can end at only a few positions within the measure, namely at
durations specified by the properties in autoBeamSettings.
These properties consist of a list of rules defining where beams can
end. The default autoBeamSettings rules are defined in
‘scm/auto-beam.scm’. To find this, see
Other sources of information.
This method must be used for the time signatures for which beam-ending rules are defined by default, unless these have all been reverted. It is also particularly suitable for many other time signatures if the time signature of the measures changes frequently, or if the beaming should be different for different beam durations.
In order to add a rule to the list, use
#(override-auto-beam-setting
'(beam-limit
beam-numerator beam-denominator
time-signature-numerator time-signature-denominator)
moment-numerator moment-denominator [context])
where
-
beam-limitis the type of automatic beam limit defined. This can be eitherbeginorendbut onlyendis effective. -
beam-numerator/beam-denominatoris the beam duration to which the rule is to apply. A beam is considered to have the duration of its shortest note. Setbeam-numeratorandbeam-denominatorto'*'to have this rule apply to beams of any duration. -
time-signature-numerator/time-signature-denominatorspecifies the time signature to which this rule should apply. Iftime-signature-numeratorandtime-signature-denominatorare set to'*'this rule will apply in any time signature. -
monent-numerator/moment-denominatoris the position in the bar at which the beam should end. -
contextis optional, and it specifies the context at which the change should be made. The default is'Voice.#(score-override-auto-beam-setting '(A B C D) E F)is equivalent to#(override-auto-beam-setting '(A B C D) E F 'Score).
For example, if automatic beams should always end on the first quarter note, whatever the time signature or beam duration, use
a8 a a a a a a a #(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * * *) 1 4) a8 a a a a a a a
You can force the beam settings to take effect only on beams whose shortest note is a certain duration
\time 2/4 % end 1/16 beams for all time signatures at the 1/16 moment #(override-auto-beam-setting '(end 1 16 * *) 1 16) a16 a a a a a a a | a32 a a a a16 a a a a a | % end 1/32 beams for all time signatures at the 1/16 moment #(override-auto-beam-setting '(end 1 32 * *) 1 16) a32 a a a a16 a a a a a |
You can force the beam settings to take effect only in certain time signatures
\time 5/8 % end beams of all durations in 5/8 time signature at the 2/8 moment #(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 5 8) 2 8) c8 c d d d \time 4/4 e8 e f f e e d d \time 5/8 c8 c d d d
When multiple voices are used the Staff context must be
specified if the beaming is to be applied to all voices in the
staff:
\time 7/8
% rhythm 3-1-1-2
% Context not specified - does not work correctly
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 7 8) 3 8)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 7 8) 4 8)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 7 8) 5 8)
<< {a8 a a a16 a a a a8 a} \\ {f4. f8 f f f} >>
% Works correctly with context specified
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 7 8) 3 8 'Staff)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 7 8) 4 8 'Staff)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 7 8) 5 8 'Staff)
<< {a8 a a a16 a a a a8 a} \\ {f4. f8 f f f} >>
|
Note: If any unexpected beam behavior occurs, check the default automatic beam settings in ‘scm/auto-beam.scm’ for possible interference, because the beam endings defined there will still apply in addition to your own. |
Any unwanted or conflicting default endings must be reverted for your time signature(s). Existing auto-beam rules are removed by using
#(revert-auto-beam-setting
'(beam-limit
beam-numerator beam-denominator
time-signature-numerator time-signature-denominator)
moment-numerator moment-denominator [context])
beam-limit, beam-numerator, beam-denominator,
time-signature-numerator, time-signature-denominator,
moment-numerator, moment-denominator and context
are the same as above.
\time 4/4 a16 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a % undo a rule ending 1/16 beams in 4/4 time at 1/4 moment #(revert-auto-beam-setting '(end 1 16 4 4) 1 4) a16 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
The rule in a revert-auto-beam-setting statement must exactly
match the original rule. That is, no wildcard expansion is taken into
account.
\time 1/4 #(override-auto-beam-setting '(end 1 16 1 4) 1 8) a16 a a a #(revert-auto-beam-setting '(end 1 16 * *) 1 8) % this won't revert it! a a a a #(revert-auto-beam-setting '(end 1 16 1 4) 1 8) % this will a a a a
Selected Snippets
Beam grouping in 7/8 time
There are no default automatic beam groupings specified for 7/8 time, so if automatic beams are required the grouping must be specified. For example, to group all beams 2-3-2 in 7/8 time, specify beam endings at 2/8 and 5/8:
\relative c'' {
\time 7/8
% rhythm 2-3-2
a8 a a a a a a
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 7 8) 2 8)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 7 8) 5 8)
a8 a a a a a a
}
Reverting default beam endings
To typeset beams grouped 3-4-3-2 in 12/8 it is necessary first
to override the default beam endings in 12/8, and then to set up the
new beaming endings:
\relative c'' {
\time 12/8
% Default beaming
a8 a a a a a a a a a a a
% Revert default values in scm/auto-beam.scm for 12/8 time
#(revert-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 12 8) 3 8)
#(revert-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 12 8) 3 4)
#(revert-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 12 8) 9 8)
a8 a a a a a a a a a a a
% Set new values for beam endings
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 12 8) 3 8)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 12 8) 7 8)
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 12 8) 10 8)
a8 a a a a a a a a a a a
}
Beam endings in Score context
Beam-ending rules specified in the Score context apply to all
staves, but can be modified at both Staff and Voice
levels:
\relative c'' {
\time 5/4
% Set default beaming for all staves
#(score-override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 5 4) 3 8)
#(score-override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 5 4) 7 8)
<<
\new Staff {
c8 c c c c c c c c c
}
\new Staff {
% Modify beaming for just this staff
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 5 4) 6 8 'Staff)
#(revert-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 5 4) 7 8 'Staff)
c8 c c c c c c c c c
}
\new Staff {
% Inherit beaming from Score context
<<
{
\voiceOne
c8 c c c c c c c c c
}
% Modify beaming for this voice only
\new Voice {
\voiceTwo
#(override-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 5 4) 6 8)
#(revert-auto-beam-setting '(end * * 5 4) 7 8)
a8 a a a a a a a a a
}
>>
}
>>
}
Predefined commands
\autoBeamOff,
\autoBeamOn.
Known issues and warnings
If a score ends while an automatic beam has not been ended and is
still accepting notes, this last beam will not be typeset at all.
The same holds for polyphonic voices, entered with <<
… \\ … >>. If a polyphonic voice ends while an
automatic beam is still accepting notes, it is not typeset.
See also
Snippets: Rhythms.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Setting automatic beam behavior ] | [ Up : Beams ] | [ Feathered beams > ] | ||
Manual beams
In some cases it may be necessary to override the automatic
beaming algorithm. For example, the autobeamer will not put beams
over rests or bar lines, and in choral scores the beaming is
often set to follow the meter of the lyrics rather than the
notes. Such beams can be specified manually by
marking the begin and end point with [ and ]
{
r4 r8[ g' a r8] r8 g[ | a] r8
}
Individual notes may be marked with \noBeam to prevent them
from being beamed:
\time 2/4 c8 c\noBeam c c
Even more strict manual control with the beams can be achieved by
setting the properties stemLeftBeamCount and
stemRightBeamCount. They specify the number of beams to
draw on the left and right side, respectively, of the next note.
If either property is set, its value will be used only once, and
then it is erased. In this example, the last f is printed
with only one beam on the left side, i.e., the eighth-note beam of
the group as a whole.
a8[ r16 f g a] a8[ r16 \set stemLeftBeamCount = #2 \set stemRightBeamCount = #1 f \set stemLeftBeamCount = #1 g a]
Selected Snippets
Flat flags and beam nibs
Flat flags on lone notes and beam nibs at the ends of beamed figures
are both possible with a combination of stemLeftBeamCount,
stemRightBeamCount and paired [] beam indicators.
For right-pointing flat flags on lone notes, use paired [] beam
indicators and set stemLeftBeamCount to zero (see Example 1).
For left-pointing flat flags, set stemRightBeamCount instead
(Example 2).
For right-pointing nibs at the end of a run of beamed notes, set
stemRightBeamCount to a positive value. And for left-pointing
nibs at the start of a run of beamed notes, set
stemLeftBeamCount instead (Example 3).
Sometimes it may make sense for a lone note surrounded by rests to
carry both a left- and right-pointing flat flag. Do this with paired
[] beam indicators alone (Example 4).
(Note that \set stemLeftBeamCount is always equivalent to
\once \set. In other words, the beam count settings are not
"sticky", so the pair of flat flags attached to the lone
c'16[] in the last example have nothing to do with the
\set two notes prior.)
\score {
<<
% Example 1
\new RhythmicStaff {
\set stemLeftBeamCount = #0
c16[]
r8.
}
% Example 2
\new RhythmicStaff {
r8.
\set stemRightBeamCount = #0
c16[]
}
% Example 3
\new RhythmicStaff {
c16 c
\set stemRightBeamCount = #2
c16 r r
\set stemLeftBeamCount = #2
c16 c c
}
% Example 4
\new RhythmicStaff {
c16 c
\set stemRightBeamCount = #2
c16 r
c16[]
r16
\set stemLeftBeamCount = #2
c16 c
}
>>
}
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Manual beams ] | [ Up : Beams ] | [ Bars > ] | ||
Feathered beams
Feathered beams are used to indicate that a small group of notes
should be played at an increasing (or decreasing) tempo, without
changing the overall tempo of the piece. The extent of the
feathered beam must be indicated manually using [ and
], and the beam feathering is turned on by specifying a
direction to the Beam property grow-direction.
If the placement of the notes and the sound in the MIDI output
is to reflect the ritardando or accelerando indicated by the
feathered beam the notes must be grouped as a
music expression delimited by braces and preceded by a
featheredDurations command which specifies the ratio
between the durations of the first and last notes in the group.
The square brackets show the extent of the beam and the braces show which notes are to have their durations modified. Normally these would delimit the same group of notes, but this is not required: the two commands are independent.
In the following example the eight 16th notes occupy exactly the same time as a half note, but the first note is one half as long as the last one, with the intermediate notes gradually lengthening. The first four 32nd notes gradually speed up, while the last four 32nd notes are at a constant tempo.
\override Beam #'grow-direction = #LEFT
\featherDurations #(ly:make-moment 2 1)
{ c16[ c c c c c c c] }
\override Beam #'grow-direction = #RIGHT
\featherDurations #(ly:make-moment 2 3)
{ c32[ d e f] }
% revert to non-feathered beams
\override Beam #'grow-direction = #'()
{ g32[ a b c] }
The spacing in the printed output represents the note durations only approximately, but the MIDI output is exact.
Known issues and warnings
The \featherDurations command only works with very short
music snippets, and when numbers in the fraction are small.
See also
Snippets: Rhythms.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Feathered beams ] | [ Up : Rhythms ] | [ Bar lines > ] | ||
1.2.5 Bars
| Bar lines | ||
| Bar numbers | ||
| Bar and bar number checks | ||
| Rehearsal marks |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Bars ] | [ Up : Bars ] | [ Bar numbers > ] | ||
Bar lines
Bar lines delimit measures, and are also used to indicate repeats. Normally, simple bar lines are automatically inserted into the printed output at places based on the current time signature.
The simple bar lines inserted automatically can be changed to
other types with the \bar command. For example, a closing
double bar line is usually placed at the end of a piece:
e4 d c2 \bar "|."
It is not invalid if the final note in a measure does not end on the automatically entered bar line: the note is assumed to carry over into the next measure. But if a long sequence of such carry-over measures appears the music can appear compressed or even flowing off the page. This is because automatic line breaks happen only at the end of complete measures, i.e., where all notes end before the end of a measure.
|
Note: An incorrect duration can cause line breaks to be inhibited, leading to a line of highly compressed music or music which flows off the page. |
Line breaks are also permitted at manually inserted bar lines even within incomplete measures. To allow a line break without printing a bar line, use
\bar ""
This will insert an invisible bar line and allow (but not force) a line break to occur at this point. The bar number counter is not increased. To force a line break see Line breaking.
This and other special bar lines may be inserted manually at any point. When they coincide with the end of a measure they replace the simple bar line which would have been inserted there automatically. When they do not coincide with the end of a measure the specified bar line is inserted at that point in the printed output. Such insertions do not affect the calculation and placement of subsequent automatic bar lines.
The simple bar line and five types of double bar line are available for manual insertion:
f1 \bar "|" g \bar "||" a \bar ".|" b \bar ".|." c \bar "|.|" d \bar "|." e
together with dotted and dashed bar lines:
f1 \bar ":" g \bar "dashed" a
and five types of repeat bar line:
f1 \bar "|:" g \bar ":|:" a \bar ":|.|:" b \bar ":|.:" c \bar ":|" d
Although the bar line types signifying repeats may be inserted manually they do not in themselves cause LilyPond to recognize a repeated section. Such repeated sections are better entered using the various repeat commands (see Repeats), which automatically print the appropriate bar lines.
In addition, you can specify "||:", which is equivalent to
"|:" except at line breaks, where it gives a double bar
line at the end of the line and a start repeat at the beginning of
the next line.
\override Score.RehearsalMark #'padding = #3 c c c c \bar "||:" c c c c \break \bar "||:" c c c c
In scores with many staves, a \bar command in one staff is
automatically applied to all staves. The resulting bar lines are
connected between different staves of a StaffGroup,
PianoStaff, or GrandStaff.
<<
\new StaffGroup <<
\new Staff {
e'4 d'
\bar "||"
f' e'
}
\new Staff { \clef bass c4 g e g }
>>
\new Staff { \clef bass c2 c2 }
>>
Selected Snippets
The command \bar bartype is a shortcut for
\set Timing.whichBar = bartype. A bar line is
created whenever the whichBar property is
set.
The default bar type used for automatically inserted bar lines is
"|". This may be changed at any time
with \set Timing.defaultBarType = bartype.
See also
Notation Reference: Line breaking, Repeats, Grouping staves.
Snippets: Rhythms.
Internals Reference: BarLine (created at Staff level), SpanBar (across staves), Timing_translator (for Timing properties).
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Bar lines ] | [ Up : Bars ] | [ Bar and bar number checks > ] | ||
Bar numbers
Bar numbers are typeset by default at the start of every line except
the first line. The number itself is stored in the
currentBarNumber property, which is normally updated
automatically for every measure. It may also be set manually:
c1 c c c \break \set Score.currentBarNumber = #50 c1 c c c
Selected Snippets
Bar numbers can be typeset at regular intervals instead of just at
the beginning of every line. To do this the default behavior
must be overridden to permit bar numbers to be printed at places
other than the start of a line. This is controlled by the
break-visibility property of BarNumber. This takes
three values which may be set to #t or #f to specify
whether the corresponding bar number is visible or not. The order
of the three values is end of line visible, middle of
line visible, beginning of line visible. In the following
example bar numbers are printed at all possible places:
\override Score.BarNumber #'break-visibility = #'#(#t #t #t) \set Score.currentBarNumber = #11 \bar "" % Permit first bar number to be printed c1 c c c \break c c c c
and here the bar numbers are printed every two measures except at the end of the line:
\override Score.BarNumber #'break-visibility = #'#(#f #t #t) \set Score.currentBarNumber = #11 \bar "" % Permit first bar number to be printed % Print a bar number every second measure \set Score.barNumberVisibility = #(every-nth-bar-number-visible 2) c1 c c c c \break c c c c c
The size of the bar number may be changed. This is illustrated
in the following example, which also shows how to enclose bar
numbers in boxes and circles, and shows an alternative way
of specifying #(#f #t #t) for break-visibility.
% Prevent bar numbers at the end of a line and permit them elsewhere
\override Score.BarNumber #'break-visibility
= #end-of-line-invisible
% Increase the size of the bar number by 2
\override Score.BarNumber #'font-size = #2
\repeat unfold 3 { c1 } \bar "|"
% Draw a box round the following bar number(s)
\override Score.BarNumber #'stencil
= #(make-stencil-boxer 0.1 0.25 ly:text-interface::print)
\repeat unfold 3 { c1 } \bar "|"
% Draw a circle round the following bar number(s)
\override Score.BarNumber #'stencil
= #(make-stencil-circler 0.1 0.25 ly:text-interface::print)
\repeat unfold 4 { c1 } \bar "|."
Bar numbers by default are left-aligned to their parent object. This is usually the left edge of a line or, if numbers are printed within a line, the left bar line of the measure. The numbers may also be positioned directly on the bar line or right-aligned to the bar line:
\set Score.currentBarNumber = #111 \override Score.BarNumber #'break-visibility = #'#(#t #t #t) % Increase the size of the bar number by 2 \override Score.BarNumber #'font-size = #2 % Print a bar number every second measure \set Score.barNumberVisibility = #(every-nth-bar-number-visible 2) c1 c1 % Center-align bar numbers \override Score.BarNumber #'self-alignment-X = #0 c1 c1 % Right-align bar numbers \override Score.BarNumber #'self-alignment-X = #-1 c1 c1
Bar numbers can be removed entirely by removing the
Bar_number_engraver from the Score context.
\layout {
\context {
\Score
\remove "Bar_number_engraver"
}
}
\relative c''{
c4 c c c \break
c4 c c c
}
See also
Snippets: Rhythms.
Internals Reference: BarNumber.
Known issues and warnings
Bar numbers may collide with the top of the
StaffGroup bracket, if there is one. To solve
this, the padding property of
BarNumber can
be used to position the number correctly.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Bar numbers ] | [ Up : Bars ] | [ Rehearsal marks > ] | ||
Bar and bar number checks
Bar checks help detect errors in the entered durations. A bar check
may be entered using the bar symbol, |, at any place where a
bar line is expected to fall. If bar check lines are encountered at
other places, a list of warnings is printed in the log file, showing
the line numbers and lines in which the bar checks failed. In the
next example, the second bar check will signal an error.
\time 3/4 c2 e4 | g2 |
Bar checks can also be used in lyrics, for example
\lyricmode {
\time 2/4
Twin -- kle | Twin -- kle |
}
An incorrect duration can result in a completely garbled score, especially if the score is polyphonic, so a good place to start correcting input is by scanning for failed bar checks and incorrect durations.
If successive bar checks are off by the same musical interval, only the first warning message is displayed. This allows the warning to focus on the source of the timing error.
It is also possible to redefine the action taken when a bar check
or pipe symbol, |, is encountered in the input, so that
it does something other than a bar check. This is done by
assigning a music expression to pipeSymbol.
In the following example | is set to insert a double bar
line wherever it appears in the input, rather than checking
for end of bar.
pipeSymbol = \bar "||"
{
c'2 c'2 |
c'2 c'2
c'2 | c'2
c'2 c'2
}
When copying large pieces of music, it can be helpful to check
that the LilyPond bar number corresponds to the original that you
are entering from. This can be checked with
\barNumberCheck, for example,
\barNumberCheck #123
will print a warning if the currentBarNumber is not 123
when it is processed.
See also
Snippets: Rhythms.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Bar and bar number checks ] | [ Up : Bars ] | [ Special rhythmic concerns > ] | ||
Rehearsal marks
To print a rehearsal mark, use the \mark command
c1 \mark \default c1 \mark \default c1 \mark #8 c1 \mark \default c1 \mark \default
The letter ‘I’ is skipped in accordance with engraving traditions. If you wish to include the letter ‘I’, then use
\set Score.markFormatter = #format-mark-alphabet
The mark is incremented automatically if you use \mark
\default, but you can also use an integer argument to set the
mark manually. The value to use is stored in the property
rehearsalMark.
The style is defined by the property markFormatter. It is
a function taking the current mark (an integer) and the current
context as argument. It should return a markup object. In the
following example, markFormatter is set to a pre-defined
procedure. After a few measures, it is set to a procedure that
produces a boxed number.
\set Score.markFormatter = #format-mark-numbers c1 \mark \default c1 \mark \default \set Score.markFormatter = #format-mark-box-numbers c1 \mark \default \set Score.markFormatter = #format-mark-circle-numbers c1 \mark \default \set Score.markFormatter = #format-mark-circle-letters c1
The file ‘scm/translation-functions.scm’ contains the
definitions of format-mark-numbers (the default format),
format-mark-box-numbers, format-mark-letters and
format-mark-box-letters. These can be used as inspiration
for other formatting functions.
You may use format-mark-barnumbers,
format-mark-box-barnumbers, and
format-mark-circle-barnumbers to get bar numbers instead of
incremented numbers or letters.
Other styles of rehearsal mark can be specified manually
\mark "A1"
Score.markFormatter does not affect marks specified in this
manner. However, it is possible to apply a \markup to the
string.
\mark \markup{ \box A1 }
Music glyphs (such as the segno sign) may be printed inside a
\mark
c1 \mark \markup { \musicglyph #"scripts.segno" }
c1 \mark \markup { \musicglyph #"scripts.coda" }
c1 \mark \markup { \musicglyph #"scripts.ufermata" }
c1
See The Feta font, for a list of symbols which may be
printed with \musicglyph.
For common tweaks to the positioning of rehearsal marks, see Formatting text.
See also
Notation Reference: The Feta font, Formatting text.
Installed Files:
‘scm/translation-functions.scm’ contains
the definition of format-mark-numbers and
format-mark-letters. They can be used as inspiration for
other formatting functions.
Snippets: Rhythms.
Internals Reference: RehearsalMark.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Rehearsal marks ] | [ Up : Rhythms ] | [ Grace notes > ] | ||
1.2.6 Special rhythmic concerns
| Grace notes | ||
| Aligning to cadenzas | ||
| Time administration |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Special rhythmic concerns ] | [ Up : Special rhythmic concerns ] | [ Aligning to cadenzas > ] | ||
Grace notes
Grace notes are ornaments that are written out. Grace notes are printed in a smaller font and take up no logical time in a measure.
c4 \grace c16 c4
\grace { c16[ d16] } c2
Lilypond also supports two special types of grace notes, the acciaccatura–an unmeasured grace note indicated by a slurred small note with a slashed stem–and the appoggiatura, which takes a fixed fraction of the main note and appears in small print without a slash.
\grace c8 b4
\acciaccatura d8 c4
\appoggiatura e8 d4
\acciaccatura { g16[ f] } e4
The placement of grace notes is synchronized between different staves. In the following example, there are two sixteenth grace notes for every eighth grace note
<< \new Staff { e2 \grace { c16[ d e f] } e2 }
\new Staff { c2 \grace { g8[ b] } c2 } >>
If you want to end a note with a grace, use the \afterGrace
command. It takes two arguments: the main note, and the grace
notes following the main note.
c1 \afterGrace d1 { c16[ d] } c1
This will put the grace notes after a space lasting 3/4 of the
length of the main note. The default fraction 3/4 can be changed by
setting afterGraceFraction. The following example shows
the results from setting the space at the default, at 15/16, and
finally at 1/2 of the main note.
<<
\new Staff {
c1 \afterGrace d1 { c16[ d] } c1
}
\new Staff {
#(define afterGraceFraction (cons 15 16))
c1 \afterGrace d1 { c16[ d] } c1
}
\new Staff {
#(define afterGraceFraction (cons 1 2))
c1 \afterGrace d1 { c16[ d] } c1
}
>>
The space between the main note and the grace note may also be specified using spacers. The following example places the grace note after a space lasting 7/8 of the main note.
\new Voice {
<< { d1^\trill_( }
{ s2 s4. \grace { c16[ d] } } >>
c1)
}
A \grace music expression will introduce special
typesetting settings, for example, to produce smaller type, and
set directions. Hence, when introducing layout tweaks to
override the special settings, they should be placed inside
the grace expression. The overrides should also be reverted
inside the grace expression. Here, the grace note’s default stem
direction is overriden and then reverted.
\new Voice {
\acciaccatura {
\stemDown
f16->
\stemNeutral
}
g4 e c2
}
Selected Snippets
The slash through the stem found in acciaccaturas can be applied in other situations:
\relative c'' {
\override Stem #'stroke-style = #"grace"
c8( d2) e8( f4)
}
The layout of grace expressions can be changed throughout the
music using the function add-grace-property. The following
example undefines the Stem direction for this grace, so
that stems do not always point up.
\relative c'' {
\new Staff {
#(add-grace-property 'Voice 'Stem 'direction ly:stem::calc-direction)
#(remove-grace-property 'Voice 'Stem 'direction)
\new Voice {
\acciaccatura { f16 } g4
\grace { d16[ e] } f4
\appoggiatura { a,32[ b c d] } e2
}
}
}
Another option is to change the variables startGraceMusic,
stopGraceMusic, startAcciaccaturaMusic,
stopAcciaccaturaMusic, startAppoggiaturaMusic,
stopAppoggiaturaMusic. The default values of these can be
seen in the file ly/grace-init.ly. By redefining
them other effects may be obtained.
Grace notes may be forced to align with regular notes in other staves:
\relative c'' {
<<
\override Score.SpacingSpanner #'strict-grace-spacing = ##t
\new Staff {
c4
\afterGrace c4 { c16[ c8 c16] }
c4 r
}
\new Staff {
c16 c c c c c c c c4 r
}
>>
}
See also
Music Glossary: grace notes, acciaccatura, appoggiatura.
Installed Files: ‘ly/grace-init.ly’.
Snippets: Rhythms.
Internals Reference: GraceMusic.
Known issues and warnings
A multi-note beamed acciaccatura is printed without a slash, and looks exactly the same as a multi-note beamed appoggiatura.
Grace note synchronization can also lead to surprises. Staff notation, such as key signatures, bar lines, etc., are also synchronized. Take care when you mix staves with grace notes and staves without, for example,
<< \new Staff { e4 \bar "|:" \grace c16 d2. }
\new Staff { c4 \bar "|:" d2. } >>
This can be remedied by inserting grace skips of the corresponding durations in the other staves. For the above example
<< \new Staff { e4 \bar "|:" \grace c16 d2. }
\new Staff { c4 \bar "|:" \grace s16 d2. } >>
Grace sections should only be used within sequential music expressions. Nesting or juxtaposing grace sections is not supported, and might produce crashes or other errors.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Grace notes ] | [ Up : Special rhythmic concerns ] | [ Time administration > ] | ||
Aligning to cadenzas
In an orchestral context, cadenzas present a special problem: when constructing a score that includes a measured cadenza or other solo passage, all other instruments should skip just as many notes as the length of the cadenza, otherwise they will start too soon or too late.
One solution to this problem is to use the functions
mmrest-of-length and skip-of-length. These Scheme
functions take a defined piece of music as an argument and generate a
multi-measure rest or \skip exactly as long as the piece.
MyCadenza = \relative c' {
c4 d8 e f g g4
f2 g4 g
}
\new GrandStaff <<
\new Staff {
\MyCadenza c'1
\MyCadenza c'1
}
\new Staff {
#(ly:export (mmrest-of-length MyCadenza))
c'1
#(ly:export (skip-of-length MyCadenza))
c'1
}
>>
See also
Music Glossary: cadenza.
Snippets: Rhythms.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Aligning to cadenzas ] | [ Up : Special rhythmic concerns ] | [ Expressive marks > ] | ||
Time administration
Time is administered by the Timing_translator, which by
default is to be found in the Score context. An alias,
Timing, is added to the context in which the
Timing_translator is placed.
The following properties of Timing are used
to keep track of timing within the score.
-
currentBarNumber The current measure number. For an example showing the use of this property see Bar numbers.
-
measureLength The length of the measures in the current time signature. For a 4/4 time this is 1, and for 6/8 it is 3/4. Its value determines when bar lines are inserted and how automatic beams should be generated.
-
measurePosition The point within the measure where we currently are. This quantity is reset by subtracting
measureLengthwhenevermeasureLengthis reached or exceeded. When that happens,currentBarNumberis incremented.-
timing If set to true, the above variables are updated for every time step. When set to false, the engraver stays in the current measure indefinitely.
Timing can be changed by setting any of these variables
explicitly. In the next example, the default 4/4 time
signature is printed, but measureLength is set to 5/4.
At 4/8 through the third measure, the measurePosition is
advanced by 1/8 to 5/8, shortening that bar by 1/8.
The next bar line then falls at 9/8 rather than 5/4.
\set Score.measureLength = #(ly:make-moment 5 4) c1 c4 c1 c4 c4 c4 \set Score.measurePosition = #(ly:make-moment 5 8) b4 b4 b8 c4 c1
As the example illustrates, ly:make-moment n m constructs a
duration of n/m of a whole note. For example,
ly:make-moment 1 8 is an eighth note duration and
ly:make-moment 7 16 is the duration of seven sixteenths
notes.
See also
This manual: Bar numbers, Unmetered music
Snippets: Rhythms.
Internals Reference: Timing_translator, Score
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Time administration ] | [ Up : Musical notation ] | [ Attached to notes > ] | ||
1.3 Expressive marks
This section lists various expressive marks that can be created in a score.
| 1.3.1 Attached to notes | ||
| 1.3.2 Curves | ||
| 1.3.3 Lines |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Expressive marks ] | [ Up : Expressive marks ] | [ Articulations and ornamentations > ] | ||
1.3.1 Attached to notes
This section explains how to create expressive marks that are attached to notes: articulations, ornamentations, and dynamics. Methods to create new dynamic markings are also discussed.
| Articulations and ornamentations | ||
| Dynamics | ||
| New dynamic marks |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Attached to notes ] | [ Up : Attached to notes ] | [ Dynamics > ] | ||
Articulations and ornamentations
A variety of symbols that denote articulations, ornamentations, and other performance indications can be attached to a note using this syntax:
note\name
The possible values for name are listed in List of articulations. For example:
c4\staccato c\mordent b2\turn c1\fermata
Some of these articulations have shorthands for easier entry.
Shorthands are appended to the note name, and their syntax
consists of a dash - followed by a symbol signifying the
articulation. Predefined shorthands exist for marcato,
stopped, tenuto, staccatissimo,
accent, staccato, and portato.
Their corresponding output appears as follows:
c4-^ c-+ c-- c-| c4-> c-. c2-_
The rules for the default placement of articulations are defined in ‘scm/script.scm’. Articulations and ornamentations may be manually placed above or below the staff, see Direction and placement.
Selected Snippets
Modifying default values for articulation shorthand notation
The shorthands are defined in ‘ly/script-init.ly’, where the
variables dashHat, dashPlus, dashDash,
dashBar, dashLarger, dashDot, and
dashUnderscore are assigned default values. The default values
for the shorthands can be modified. For example, to associate the
-+ (dashPlus) shorthand with the trill symbol instead of
the default + symbol, assign the value trill to the variable
dashPlus:
\relative c'' { c1-+ }
dashPlus = "trill"
\relative c'' { c1-+ }
Controlling the vertical ordering of scripts
The vertical ordering of scripts is controlled with the
'script-priority property. The lower this number, the closer it
will be put to the note. In this example, the TextScript (the
sharp symbol) first has the lowest priority, so it is put lowest in the
first example. In the second, the prall trill (the Script) has
the lowest, so it is on the inside. When two objects have the same
priority, the order in which they are entered determines which one
comes first.
\relative c''' {
\once \override TextScript #'script-priority = #-100
a2^\prall^\markup { \sharp }
\once \override Script #'script-priority = #-100
a2^\prall^\markup { \sharp }
}
Creating a delayed turn
Creating a delayed turn, where the lower note of the turn uses the
accidental, requires several overrides. The
outside-staff-priority property must be set to #f, as
otherwise this would take precedence over the avoid-slur
property. The value of halign is used to position the turn
horizontally.
\relative c'' {
\once \override TextScript #'avoid-slur = #'inside
\once \override TextScript #'outside-staff-priority = ##f
c2(^\markup \tiny \override #'(baseline-skip . 1) {
\halign #-4
\center-column {
\sharp
\musicglyph #"scripts.turn"
}
}
d4.) c8
}
See also
Music Glossary: tenuto, accent, staccato, portato.
Notation Reference: Direction and placement, List of articulations, Trills.
Installed Files: ‘scm/script.scm’.
Snippets: Expressive marks.
Internals Reference: Script, TextScript.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Articulations and ornamentations ] | [ Up : Attached to notes ] | [ New dynamic marks > ] | ||
Dynamics
Absolute dynamic marks are specified using a command after a note,
such as c4\ff. The available dynamic marks are
\ppppp, \pppp, \ppp, \pp, \p,
\mp, \mf, \f, \ff, \fff,
\ffff, \fp, \sf, \sff, \sp,
\spp, \sfz, and \rfz. The dynamic marks may
be manually placed above or below the staff, see
Direction and placement.
c2\ppp c\mp c2\rfz c^\mf c2_\spp c^\ff
A crescendo mark is started with \< and
terminated with \!, an absolute dynamic, or an additional
crescendo or decrescendo mark. A decrescendo mark is
started with \> and is also terminated with \!, an
absolute dynamic, or another crescendo or decrescendo mark.
\cr and \decr may be used instead of \< and
\>. Hairpins are engraved by default using this
notation.
c2\< c\! d2\< d\f e2\< e\> f2\> f\! e2\> e\mp d2\> d\> c1\!
Spacer rests are needed to engrave multiple marks on one note.
c4\< c\! d\> e\!
<< f1 { s4 s4\< s4\> s4\! } >>
In some situations the \espressivo articulation mark may be
the appropriate choice to indicate a crescendo and decrescendo on
one note:
c2 b4 a g1\espressivo
Crescendos and decrescendos can be engraved as textual markings
instead of hairpins. Dashed lines are printed to indicate their
extent. The built-in commands that enable these text modes are
\crescTextCresc, \dimTextDecresc,
\dimTextDecr, and \dimTextDim. The corresponding
\crescHairpin and \dimHairpin commands will revert
to hairpins again:
\crescTextCresc c2\< d | e f\! \dimTextDecresc e2\> d | c b\! \crescHairpin c2\< d | e f\! \dimHairpin e2\> d\!
To create new absolute dynamic marks or text that should be aligned with dynamics, see New dynamic marks.
Vertical positioning of dynamics is handled by DynamicLineSpanner.
Predefined commands
\dynamicUp,
\dynamicDown,
\dynamicNeutral,
\crescTextCresc,
\dimTextDim,
\dimTextDecr,
\dimTextDecresc,
\crescHairpin,
\dimHairpin.
Selected Snippets
Setting hairpin behavior at bar lines
If the note which ends a hairpin falls on a downbeat, the hairpin stops
at the bar line immediately preceding. This behavior can be controlled
by overriding the 'to-barline property.
\relative c'' {
e4\< e2.
e1\!
\override Hairpin #'to-barline = ##f
e4\< e2.
e1\!
}
Setting the minimum length of hairpins
If hairpins are too short, they can be lengthened by modifying the
minimum-length property of the Hairpin object.
\relative c'' {
c4\< c\! d\> e\!
\override Hairpin #'minimum-length = #5
<< f1 { s4 s\< s\> s\! } >>
}
Printing hairpins using al niente notation
Hairpins may be printed with a circled tip (al niente notation) by
setting the circled-tip property of the Hairpin object to
#t.
\relative c'' {
\override Hairpin #'circled-tip = ##t
c2\< c\!
c4\> c\< c2\!
}
Vertically aligned dynamics and textscripts
By setting the 'Y-extent property to a suitable value, all
DynamicLineSpanner objects (hairpins and dynamic texts) can be
aligned to a common reference point, regardless of their actual extent.
This way, every element will be vertically aligned, thus producing a
more pleasing output.
The same idea is used to align the text scripts along their baseline.
music = \relative c'' {
c2\p^\markup { gorgeous } c\f^\markup { fantastic }
c4\p c\f\> c c\!\p
}
{
\music \break
\override DynamicLineSpanner #'staff-padding = #2.0
\override DynamicLineSpanner #'Y-extent = #'(-1.5 . 1.5)
\override TextScript #'Y-extent = #'(-1.5 . 1.5)
\music
}
Hiding the extender line for text dynamics
Text style dynamic changes (such as cresc. and dim.) are printed with a dashed line showing their extent. This line can be suppressed in the following way:
\relative c'' {
\override DynamicTextSpanner #'dash-period = #-1.0
\crescTextCresc
c1\< | d | b | c\!
}
Changing text and spanner styles for text dynamics
The text used for crescendos and decrescendos can be changed by
modifying the context properties crescendoText and
decrescendoText. The style of the spanner line can be changed by
modifying the 'style property of DynamicTextSpanner. The
default value is 'hairpin, and other possible values include
'line, 'dashed-line and 'dotted-line.
\relative c'' {
\set crescendoText = \markup { \italic { cresc. poco } }
\set crescendoSpanner = #'text
\override DynamicTextSpanner #'style = #'dotted-line
a2\< a
a2 a
a2 a
a2 a\mf
}
See also
Music Glossary: al niente, crescendo, decrescendo, hairpin.
Learning Manual: Articulation and dynamics.
Notation Reference: Direction and placement, New dynamic marks, What goes into the MIDI output?, Controlling MIDI dynamics.
Snippets: Expressive marks.
Internals Reference: DynamicText, Hairpin, DynamicLineSpanner.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Dynamics ] | [ Up : Attached to notes ] | [ Curves > ] | ||
New dynamic marks
The easiest way to create dynamic indications is to use
\markup objects.
moltoF = \markup { molto \dynamic f }
\relative c' {
<d e>16_\moltoF <d e>
<d e>2..
}
In markup mode, editorial dynamics (within parentheses or square brackets) can be created. The syntax for markup mode is described in Formatting text.
roundF = \markup { \center-align \concat { \bold { \italic ( }
\dynamic f \bold { \italic ) } } }
boxF = \markup { \bracket { \dynamic f } }
\relative c' {
c1_\roundF
c1_\boxF
}
Simple, centered dynamic marks are easily created with the
make-dynamic-script function. The dynamic font only
contains the characters f,m,p,r,s and z.
sfzp = #(make-dynamic-script "sfzp")
\relative c' {
c4 c c\sfzp c
}
In general, make-dynamic-script takes any markup object as
its argument. In the following example, using
make-dynamic-script ensures the vertical alignment of
markup objects and hairpins that are attached to the same note
head.
roundF = \markup { \center-align \concat {
\normal-text { \bold { \italic ( } }
\dynamic f
\normal-text { \bold { \italic ) } } } }
boxF = \markup { \bracket { \dynamic f } }
roundFdynamic = #(make-dynamic-script roundF)
boxFdynamic = #(make-dynamic-script boxF)
\relative c' {
c4_\roundFdynamic\< d e f
g,1_\boxFdynamic
}
The Scheme form of markup mode may be used instead. Its syntax is explained in Markup construction in Scheme.
moltoF = #(make-dynamic-script
(markup #:normal-text "molto"
#:dynamic "f"))
\relative c' {
<d e>16 <d e>
<d e>2..\moltoF
}
Font settings in markup mode are described in Selecting font and font size.
See also
Notation Reference: Formatting text, Selecting font and font size, Markup construction in Scheme, What goes into the MIDI output?, Controlling MIDI dynamics.
Snippets: Expressive marks.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < New dynamic marks ] | [ Up : Expressive marks ] | [ Slurs > ] | ||
1.3.2 Curves
This section explains how to create various expressive marks that are curved: normal slurs, phrasing slurs, breath marks, falls, and doits.
| Slurs | ||
| Phrasing slurs | ||
| Breath marks | ||
| Falls and doits |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Curves ] | [ Up : Curves ] | [ Phrasing slurs > ] | ||
Slurs
Slurs are entered using parentheses:
f4( g a) a8 b( a4 g2 f4) <c e>2( <b d>2)
Slurs may be manually placed above or below the notes, see Direction and placement.
c2( d) \slurDown c2( d) \slurNeutral c2( d)
Simultaneous or overlapping slurs are not permitted, but a phrasing slur can overlap a slur. This permits two slurs to be printed at once. For details, see Phrasing slurs.
Slurs can be solid, dotted, or dashed. Solid is the default slur style:
c4( e g2) \slurDashed g4( e c2) \slurDotted c4( e g2) \slurSolid g4( e c2)
Predefined commands
\slurUp,
\slurDown,
\slurNeutral,
\slurDashed,
\slurDotted,
\slurSolid.
Selected Snippets
Using double slurs for legato chords
Some composers write two slurs when they want legato chords. This can
be achieved by setting doubleSlurs.
\relative c' {
\set doubleSlurs = ##t
<c e>4( <d f> <c e> <d f>)
}
Positioning text markups inside slurs
Text markups need to have the outside-staff-priority property
set to false in order to be printed inside slurs.
\relative c'' {
\override TextScript #'avoid-slur = #'inside
\override TextScript #'outside-staff-priority = ##f
c2(^\markup { \halign #-10 \natural } d4.) c8
}
See also
Music Glossary: slur.
Learning Manual: On the un-nestedness of brackets and ties.
Notation Reference: Direction and placement, Phrasing slurs.
Snippets: Expressive marks.
Internals Reference: Slur.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Slurs ] | [ Up : Curves ] | [ Breath marks > ] | ||
Phrasing slurs
Phrasing slurs (or phrasing marks) that indicate a
musical sentence are written using the commands \( and
\) respectively:
c4\( d( e) f( e2) d\)
Typographically, a phrasing slur behaves almost exactly like a
normal slur. However, they are treated as different objects; a
\slurUp will have no effect on a phrasing slur. Phrasing
slurs may be manually placed above or below the notes, see
Direction and placement.
c4\( g' c,( b) | c1\) \phrasingSlurUp c4\( g' c,( b) | c1\)
Simultaneous or overlapping phrasing slurs are not permitted.
Phrasing slurs can be solid, dotted, or dashed. Solid is the default style for phrasing slurs:
c4\( e g2\) \phrasingSlurDashed g4\( e c2\) \phrasingSlurDotted c4\( e g2\) \phrasingSlurSolid g4\( e c2\)
Predefined commands
\phrasingSlurUp,
\phrasingSlurDown,
\phrasingSlurNeutral,
\phrasingSlurDashed,
\phrasingSlurDotted,
\phrasingSlurSolid.
See also
Learning Manual: On the un-nestedness of brackets and ties.
Notation Reference: Direction and placement.
Snippets: Expressive marks.
Internals Reference: PhrasingSlur.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Phrasing slurs ] | [ Up : Curves ] | [ Falls and doits > ] | ||
Breath marks
Breath marks are entered using \breathe:
c2. \breathe d4
Musical indicators for breath marks in ancient notation, divisiones, are supported. For details, see Divisiones.
Selected Snippets
Changing the breath mark symbol
The glyph of the breath mark can be tuned by overriding the text
property of the BreathingSign layout object with any markup
text.
\relative c'' {
c2
\override BreathingSign #'text = \markup { \musicglyph #"scripts.rvarcomma" }
\breathe
d2
}
Inserting a caesura
Caesura marks can be created by overriding the 'text property of
the BreathingSign object. A curved caesura mark is also
available.
\relative c'' {
\override BreathingSign #'text = \markup {
\musicglyph #"scripts.caesura.straight"
}
c8 e4. \breathe g8. e16 c4
\override BreathingSign #'text = \markup {
\musicglyph #"scripts.caesura.curved"
}
g8 e'4. \breathe g8. e16 c4
}
See also
Music Glossary: caesura.
Notation Reference: Divisiones.
Snippets: Expressive marks.
Internals Reference: BreathingSign.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Breath marks ] | [ Up : Curves ] | [ Lines > ] | ||
Falls and doits
Falls and doits can be added to notes using
the \bendAfter command. The direction of the fall or doit
is indicated with a plus or minus (up or down). The number
indicates the pitch interval that the fall or doit will extend
beyond the main note.
c2-\bendAfter #+4 c2-\bendAfter #-4 c2-\bendAfter #+8 c2-\bendAfter #-8
The dash - immediately preceding the \bendAfter
command is required when writing falls and doits.
Selected Snippets
Adjusting the shape of falls and doits
The shortest-duration-space property may have to be tweaked to
adjust the shape of falls and doits.
\relative c'' {
\override Score.SpacingSpanner #'shortest-duration-space = #4.0
c2-\bendAfter #+5
c2-\bendAfter #-3
c2-\bendAfter #+8
c2-\bendAfter #-6
}
See also
Snippets: Expressive marks.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Falls and doits ] | [ Up : Expressive marks ] | [ Glissando > ] | ||
1.3.3 Lines
This section explains how to create various expressive marks that follow a linear path: glissandos, arpeggios, and trills.
| Glissando | ||
| Arpeggio | ||
| Trills |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Lines ] | [ Up : Lines ] | [ Arpeggio > ] | ||
Glissando
A glissando is created by attaching \glissando
to a note:
g2\glissando g' c2\glissando c,
Different styles of glissandi can be created. For details, see Line styles.
Selected Snippets
Contemporary glissando
A contemporary glissando without a final note can be typeset using a hidden note and cadenza timing.
\relative c'' {
\time 3/4
\override Glissando #'style = #'zigzag
c4 c
\cadenzaOn
c4\glissando
\hideNotes
c,,4
\unHideNotes
\cadenzaOff
\bar "|"
}
See also
Music Glossary: glissando.
Notation Reference: Line styles.
Snippets: Expressive marks.
Internals Reference: Glissando.
Known issues and warnings
Printing text over the line (such as gliss.) is not supported.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Glissando ] | [ Up : Lines ] | [ Trills > ] | ||
Arpeggio
An arpeggio on a chord (also known as a broken chord)
is denoted by appending \arpeggio to the chord construct:
<c e g c>1\arpeggio
Different types of arpeggios may be written.
\arpeggioNormal reverts to a normal arpeggio:
<c e g c>2\arpeggio \arpeggioArrowUp <c e g c>2\arpeggio \arpeggioArrowDown <c e g c>2\arpeggio \arpeggioNormal <c e g c>2\arpeggio
Special bracketed arpeggio symbols can be created:
<c e g c>2 \arpeggioBracket <c e g c>2\arpeggio \arpeggioParenthesis <c e g c>2\arpeggio \arpeggioNormal <c e g c>2\arpeggio
Arpeggios can be explicitly written out with ties. For more information, see Ties.
Predefined commands
\arpeggio,
\arpeggioArrowUp,
\arpeggioArrowDown,
\arpeggioNormal,
\arpeggioBracket,
\arpeggioParenthesis.
Selected Snippets
Creating cross-staff arpeggios in a piano staff
In a PianoStaff, it is possible to let an arpeggio cross between
the staves by setting the property PianoStaff.connectArpeggios.
\new PianoStaff \relative c'' <<
\set PianoStaff.connectArpeggios = ##t
\new Staff {
<c e g c>4\arpeggio
<g c e g>4\arpeggio
<e g c e>4\arpeggio
<c e g c>4\arpeggio
}
\new Staff {
\clef bass
\repeat unfold 4 {
<c,, e g c>4\arpeggio
}
}
>>
Creating cross-staff arpeggios in other contexts
Cross-staff arpeggios can be created in contexts other than
PianoStaff if the Span_arpeggio_engraver is included in
the Score context.
\score {
\new StaffGroup {
\set Score.connectArpeggios = ##t
<<
\new Voice \relative c' {
<c e>2\arpeggio
<d f>2\arpeggio
<c e>1\arpeggio
}
\new Voice \relative c {
\clef bass
<c g'>2\arpeggio
<b g'>2\arpeggio
<c g'>1\arpeggio
}
>>
}
\layout {
\context {
\Score
\consists "Span_arpeggio_engraver"
}
}
}
Creating arpeggios across notes in different voices
An arpeggio can be drawn across notes in different voices on the same
staff if the Span_arpeggio_engraver is moved to the Staff
context:
\new Staff \with {
\consists "Span_arpeggio_engraver"
}
\relative c' {
\set Staff.connectArpeggios = ##t
<<
{ <e' g>4\arpeggio <d f> <d f>2 } \\
{ <d, f>2\arpeggio <g b>2 }
>>
}
See also
Music Glossary: arpeggio.
Notation Reference: Ties.
Snippets: Expressive marks.
Internals Reference: Arpeggio, PianoStaff.
Known issues and warnings
It is not possible to mix connected arpeggios and unconnected
arpeggios in one PianoStaff at the same point in
time.
The parenthesis-style arpeggio brackets do not work for cross-staff arpeggios.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Arpeggio ] | [ Up : Lines ] | [ Repeats > ] | ||
Trills
Short trills without an extender line are printed with
\trill; see Articulations and ornamentations.
Longer trills with an extender line are made with
\startTrillSpan and \stopTrillSpan:
d1~\startTrillSpan d1 c2\stopTrillSpan r2
In the following example, a trill is combined with grace notes. The syntax of this construct and the method to precisely position the grace notes are described in Grace notes.
c1 \afterGrace
d1\startTrillSpan { c32[ d]\stopTrillSpan }
e2 r2
Trills that require an auxiliary note with an explicit pitch can
be typeset with the \pitchedTrill command. The first
argument is the main note, and the second is the trilled
note, printed as a stemless note head in parentheses.
\pitchedTrill e2\startTrillSpan fis d\stopTrillSpan
In the following example, the second pitched trill is ambiguous; the accidental of the trilled note is not printed. As a workaround, the accidentals of the trilled notes can be forced. The second measure illustrates this method:
\pitchedTrill eis4\startTrillSpan fis g\stopTrillSpan \pitchedTrill eis4\startTrillSpan fis g\stopTrillSpan \pitchedTrill eis4\startTrillSpan fis g\stopTrillSpan \pitchedTrill eis4\startTrillSpan fis! g\stopTrillSpan
Predefined commands
\startTrillSpan,
\stopTrillSpan.
See also
Music Glossary: trill.
Notation Reference: Articulations and ornamentations, Grace notes.
Snippets: Expressive marks.
Internals Reference: TrillSpanner.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Trills ] | [ Up : Musical notation ] | [ Long repeats > ] | ||
1.4 Repeats
Repetition is a central concept in music, and multiple notations exist for repetitions. LilyPond supports the following kinds of repeats:
-
volta The repeated music is not written out but enclosed between repeat bar lines. If the repeat is at the beginning of a piece, a repeat bar line is only printed at the end of the repeat. Alternative endings (volte) are printed left to right with brackets. This is the standard notation for repeats with alternatives.
-
unfold The repeated music is fully written out, as many times as specified by repeatcount. This is useful when entering repetitious music.
-
percent These are beat or measure repeats. They look like single slashes or percent signs.
-
tremolo This is used to write tremolo beams.
| 1.4.1 Long repeats | ||
| 1.4.2 Short repeats |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Repeats ] | [ Up : Repeats ] | [ Normal repeats > ] | ||
1.4.1 Long repeats
This section discusses how to input long (usually multi-measure) repeats. The repeats can take two forms: repeats enclosed between repeat signs; or written out repeats, used to input repetitious music. Repeat signs can also be controlled manually.
| Normal repeats | ||
| Manual repeat marks | ||
| Written-out repeats |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Long repeats ] | [ Up : Long repeats ] | [ Manual repeat marks > ] | ||
Normal repeats
The syntax for a normal repeat is
\repeat volta repeatcount musicexpr
where musicexpr is a music expression. Alternate endings can be
produced using \alternative. In order to delimit the alternate
endings, the group of alternatives must be enclosed in a set of
braces. If there are more repeats than there are alternate endings,
the earliest repeats are given the first alternative.
Normal repeats without alternate endings:
\repeat volta 2 { c4 d e f }
c2 d
\repeat volta 2 { d4 e f g }
Normal repeats with alternate endings:
\repeat volta 4 { c4 d e f }
\alternative {
{ d2 e }
{ f2 g }
}
c1
Repeats with upbeats can be entered in two ways:
\partial 4
e |
\repeat volta 4 { c2 d | e2 f | }
\alternative {
{ g4 g g e }
{ a4 a a a | b2. }
}
or
\partial 4
\repeat volta 4 { e4 | c2 d | e2 f | }
\alternative {
{ \partial 4*3 g4 g g }
{ a4 a a a | b2. }
}
Ties may be added to a second ending:
c1
\repeat volta 2 { c4 d e f ~ }
\alternative {
{ f2 d }
{ f2\repeatTie f, }
}
Selected Snippets
Shortening volta brackets
By default, the volta brackets will be drawn over all of the
alternative music, but it is possible to shorten them by setting
voltaSpannerDuration. In the next example, the bracket only
lasts one measure, which is a duration of 3/4.
\relative c'' {
\time 3/4
c4 c c
\set Score.voltaSpannerDuration = #(ly:make-moment 3 4)
\repeat volta 5 { d4 d d }
\alternative {
{
e4 e e
f4 f f
}
{ g4 g g }
}
}
Adding volta brackets to additional staves
The Volta_engraver by default resides in the Score
context, and brackets for the repeat are thus normally only printed
over the topmost staff. This can be adjusted by adding the
Volta_engraver to the Staff context where the brackets
should appear; see also the "Volta multi staff" snippet.
<<
\new Staff { \repeat volta 2 { c'1 } \alternative { c' } }
\new Staff { \repeat volta 2 { c'1 } \alternative { c' } }
\new Staff \with { \consists "Volta_engraver" } { c'2 g' e' a' }
\new Staff { \repeat volta 2 { c'1 } \alternative { c' } }
>>
See also
Music Glossary: repeat, volta.
Notation Reference: Bar lines, Modifying context plug-ins.
Snippets: Repeats.
Internals Reference: VoltaBracket, RepeatedMusic, VoltaRepeatedMusic, UnfoldedRepeatedMusic.
Known issues and warnings
A nested repeat like
\repeat … \repeat … \alternative
is ambiguous, since it is is not clear to which \repeat the
\alternative belongs. This ambiguity is resolved by always
having the \alternative belong to the inner \repeat.
For clarity, it is advisable to use braces in such situations.
Timing information is not remembered at the start of an alternative,
so after a repeat timing information must be reset by hand; for
example, by setting Score.measurePosition or entering
\partial. Similarly, slurs are also not repeated.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Normal repeats ] | [ Up : Long repeats ] | [ Written-out repeats > ] | ||
Manual repeat marks
|
Note: These methods are only used for displaying unusual repeat
constructs, and may produce unexpected behavior. In most cases,
repeats should be created using the standard |
The property repeatCommands can be used to control the
layout of repeats. Its value is a Scheme list of repeat commands.
-
start-repeat Print a
|:bar line.c1 \set Score.repeatCommands = #'(start-repeat) d4 e f g c1
As per standard engraving practice, repeat signs are not printed at the beginning of a piece.
-
end-repeat Print a
:|bar line:c1 d4 e f g \set Score.repeatCommands = #'(end-repeat) c1
-
(volta number) ... (volta #f) Create a new volta with the specified number. The volta bracket must be explicitly terminated, or it will not be printed.
f4 g a b \set Score.repeatCommands = #'((volta "2")) g4 a g a \set Score.repeatCommands = #'((volta #f)) c1
Multiple repeat commands may occur at the same point:
f4 g a b \set Score.repeatCommands = #'((volta "2, 5") end-repeat) g4 a g a c1 \set Score.repeatCommands = #'((volta #f) (volta "95") end-repeat) b1 \set Score.repeatCommands = #'((volta #f))
Text can be included with the volta bracket. The text can be a number or numbers or markup text, see Formatting text. The simplest way to use markup text is to define the markup first, then include the markup in a Scheme list.
voltaAdLib = \markup { 1. 2. 3... \text \italic { ad lib. } }
\relative c'' {
c1
\set Score.repeatCommands = #(list(list 'volta voltaAdLib) 'start-repeat)
c4 b d e
\set Score.repeatCommands = #'((volta #f) (volta "4.") end-repeat)
f1
\set Score.repeatCommands = #'((volta #f))
}
Selected Snippets
Printing a repeat sign at the beginning of a piece
A |: bar line can be printed at the beginning of a piece, by
overriding the relevant property:
\relative c'' {
\once \override Score.BreakAlignment #'break-align-orders =
#(make-vector 3 '(instrument-name
left-edge
ambitus
span-bar
breathing-sign
clef
key-signature
time-signature
staff-bar
custos
span-bar))
\bar "|:"
c1
d1
d4 e f g
}
See also
Notation Reference: Bar lines, Formatting text.
Snippets: Repeats.
Internals Reference: VoltaBracket, RepeatedMusic, VoltaRepeatedMusic.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Manual repeat marks ] | [ Up : Long repeats ] | [ Short repeats > ] | ||
Written-out repeats
By using the unfold command, repeats can be used to simplify
the writing out of repetitious music. The syntax is
\repeat unfold repeatcount musicexpr
where musicexpr is a music expression and repeatcount is the number of times musicexpr is repeated.
c1
\repeat unfold 2 { c4 d e f }
c1
Unfold repeats can be made with alternate endings. If there are more repeats than there are alternate endings, the first alternative ending is applied to the earliest endings.
c1
\repeat unfold 2 { g4 f e d }
\alternative {
{ cis2 g' }
{ cis,2 b }
}
c1
See also
Snippets: Repeats.
Internals Reference: RepeatedMusic, UnfoldedRepeatedMusic.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Written-out repeats ] | [ Up : Repeats ] | [ Percent repeats > ] | ||
1.4.2 Short repeats
This section discusses how to input short repeats. Short repeats can take two basic forms: repeats of a single note to two measures, represented by slashes or percent signs; and tremolos.
| Percent repeats | ||
| Tremolo repeats |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Short repeats ] | [ Up : Short repeats ] | [ Tremolo repeats > ] | ||
Percent repeats
Repeated short patterns of notes are supported. The music is printed once, and the pattern is replaced with a special sign. Patterns that are shorter than one measure are replaced by slashes, and patterns of one or two measures are replaced by percent-like signs. The syntax is
\repeat percent number musicexpr
where musicexpr is a music expression.
\repeat percent 4 { c4 }
\repeat percent 2 { b4 a g f }
\repeat percent 2 { c2 es | f4 fis g c | }
Selected Snippets
Percent repeat counter
Measure repeats of more than two repeats can get a counter when the convenient property is switched, as shown in this example:
\relative c'' {
\set countPercentRepeats = ##t
\repeat percent 4 { c1 }
}
Percent repeat count visibility
Percent repeat counters can be shown at regular intervals by setting
the context property repeatCountVisibility.
\relative c'' {
\set countPercentRepeats = ##t
\set repeatCountVisibility = #(every-nth-repeat-count-visible 5)
\repeat percent 10 { c1 } \break
\set repeatCountVisibility = #(every-nth-repeat-count-visible 2)
\repeat percent 6 { c1 d1 }
}
Isolated percent repeats
Isolated percents can also be printed. This is done by entering a multi-measure rest with a different print function:
\relative c'' {
\override MultiMeasureRest #'stencil
= #ly:multi-measure-rest::percent
\override MultiMeasureRest #'thickness = #0.48
R1
}
See also
Music Glossary: percent repeat, simile.
Snippets: Repeats.
Internals Reference: RepeatSlash, PercentRepeat, DoublePercentRepeat, DoublePercentRepeatCounter, PercentRepeatCounter, PercentRepeatedMusic.
Known issues and warnings
Only three kinds of percent repeats are supported: a single slash representing a single beat (regardless of the duration of the repeated notes); a single slash with dots representing one full measure; and two slashes with dots crossing a bar line representing two full measures. Neither multiple slashes representing single beat repeats consisting of sixteenth or shorter notes, nor two slashes with dots representing single beat repeats consisting of notes of varying durations, are supported.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Percent repeats ] | [ Up : Short repeats ] | [ Simultaneous notes > ] | ||
Tremolo repeats
Tremolos can take two forms: alternation between two chords or two notes, and rapid repetition of a single note or chord. Tremolos consisting of an alternation are indicated by adding beams between the notes or chords being alternated, while tremolos consisting of the rapid repetition of a single note are indicated by adding beams or slashes to a single note.
To place tremolo marks between notes, use \repeat with
tremolo style:
\repeat tremolo 8 { c16 d }
\repeat tremolo 6 { c16 d }
\repeat tremolo 2 { c16 d }
The \repeat tremolo syntax expects exactly two notes within
the braces, and the number of repetitions must correspond to a
note value that can be expressed with plain or dotted notes. Thus,
\repeat tremolo 7 is valid and produces a double dotted
note, but \repeat tremolo 9 is not.
The duration of the tremolo equals the duration of the
braced expression multiplied by the number of repeats:
\repeat tremolo 8 { c16 d16 } gives a whole note tremolo,
notated as two whole notes joined by tremolo beams.
There are two ways to put tremolo marks on a single note. The
\repeat tremolo syntax is also used here, in which case
the note should not be surrounded by braces:
\repeat tremolo 4 c'16
The same output can be obtained by adding
‘:[number]’ after the note. The number indicates
the duration of the subdivision, and it must be at least 8. A
number value of 8 gives one line across the note stem. If
the length is omitted, the last value (stored in
tremoloFlags) is used
c2:8 c:32 c: c:
See also
Snippets: Repeats.
Known issues and warnings
Cross-staff tremolos do not work well.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Tremolo repeats ] | [ Up : Musical notation ] | [ Single voice > ] | ||
1.5 Simultaneous notes
Polyphony in music refers to having more than one voice occurring in a piece of music. Polyphony in LilyPond refers to having more than one voice on the same staff.
| 1.5.1 Single voice | ||
| 1.5.2 Multiple voices |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Simultaneous notes ] | [ Up : Simultaneous notes ] | [ Chorded notes > ] | ||
1.5.1 Single voice
This section discusses simultaneous notes inside the same voice.
| Chorded notes | ||
| Simultaneous expressions | ||
| Clusters |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Single voice ] | [ Up : Single voice ] | [ Simultaneous expressions > ] | ||
Chorded notes
A chord is formed by enclosing a set of pitches between <
and >. A chord may be followed by a duration and/or a set
of articulations, just like simple notes:
<c e g>2 <c f a>4-> <e g c>-.
Relative mode can be used for pitches in chords. The octave of each pitch is chosen using the preceding pitch as a reference except in the case of the first pitch in a chord: the reference for the first pitch is the first pitch of the preceding chord.
For more information about chords, see Chord notation.
See also
Music Glossary: chord.
Learning Manual: Combining notes into chords.
Notation Reference: Chord notation.
Snippets: Simultaneous notes.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Chorded notes ] | [ Up : Single voice ] | [ Clusters > ] | ||
Simultaneous expressions
One or more music expressions enclosed in double angle brackets are taken to be simultaneous. If the first expression begins with a single note or if the whole simultaneous expression appears explicitly within a single voice, the whole expression is placed on a single staff; otherwise the elements of the simultaneous expression are placed on separate staves.
The following examples show simultaneous expressions on one staff:
\new Voice { % explicit single voice
<< {a4 b g2} {d4 g c,2} >>
}
% single first note
a << {a4 b g} {d4 g c,} >>
This can be useful if the simultaneous sections have identical rhythms, but attempts to attach notes with different durations to the same stem will cause errors.
The following example shows how simultaneous expressions can generate multiple staves implicitly:
% no single first note
<< {a4 b g2} {d4 g2 c,4} >>
Here different rhythms cause no problems.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Simultaneous expressions ] | [ Up : Single voice ] | [ Multiple voices > ] | ||
Clusters
A cluster indicates a continuous range of pitches to be played.
They can be denoted as the envelope of a set of notes. They are
entered by applying the function \makeClusters to a sequence
of chords, e.g.,
\makeClusters { <g b>2 <c g'> }
Ordinary notes and clusters can be put together in the same staff, even simultaneously. In such a case no attempt is made to automatically avoid collisions between ordinary notes and clusters.
See also
Music Glossary: cluster.
Snippets: Simultaneous notes.
Internals Reference: ClusterSpanner, ClusterSpannerBeacon, Cluster_spanner_engraver.
Known issues and warnings
Clusters look good only if they span at least two chords; otherwise they appear too narrow.
Clusters do not have a stem and cannot indicate durations by themselves, but the length of the printed cluster is determined by the durations of the defining chords. Separate clusters need a separating rest between them.
Clusters do not produce MIDI output.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Clusters ] | [ Up : Simultaneous notes ] | [ Single-staff polyphony > ] | ||
1.5.2 Multiple voices
This section discusses simultaneous notes in multiple voices or multiple staves.
| Single-staff polyphony | ||
| Voice styles | ||
| Collision resolution | ||
| Automatic part combining | ||
| Writing music in parallel |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Multiple voices ] | [ Up : Multiple voices ] | [ Voice styles > ] | ||
Single-staff polyphony
Explicitly instantiating voices
The basic structure needed to achieve multiple independent voices in a single staff is illustrated in the following example:
\new Staff <<
\new Voice = "first"
{ \voiceOne r8 r16 g e8. f16 g8[ c,] f e16 d }
\new Voice= "second"
{ \voiceTwo d16 c d8~ d16 b c8~ c16 b c8~ c16 b8. }
>>
Here, voices are instantiated explicitly and are given names. The
\voiceOne ... \voiceFour commands set up the voices
so that first and third voices get stems up, second and fourth
voices get stems down, third and fourth voice note heads are
horizontally shifted, and rests in the respective voices are
automatically moved to avoid collisions. The \oneVoice
command returns all the voice settings to the neutral default
directions.
Temporary polyphonic passages
A temporary polyphonic passage can be created with the following construct:
<< { \voiceOne ... }
\new Voice { \voiceTwo ... }
>> \oneVoice
Here, the first expression within a temporary polyphonic passage is
placed into the Voice context which was in use immediately
before the polyphonic passage, and that same Voice context
continues after the temporary section. Other expressions within
the angle brackets are assigned to distinct temporary voices.
This allows lyrics to be assigned to one continuing voice before,
during and after a polyphonic section:
<<
\new Voice = "melody" {
a4
<<
{
\voiceOne
g f
}
\new Voice {
\voiceTwo
d2
}
>>
\oneVoice
e4
}
\new Lyrics \lyricsto "melody" {
This is my song.
}
>>
Here, the \voiceOne and \voiceTwo commands are
required to define the settings of each voice.
The double backslash construct
The << {...} \\ {...} >> construct, where the two (or
more) expressions are separated by double backslashes, behaves
differently to the similar construct without the double backslashes:
all the expressions within this contruct are assigned
to new Voice contexts. These new Voice contexts
are created implicitly and are given the fixed names "1",
"2", etc.
The first example could be typeset as follows:
<<
{ r8 r16 g e8. f16 g8[ c,] f e16 d }
\\
{ d16 c d8~ d16 b c8~ c16 b c8~ c16 b8. }
>>
This syntax can be used where it does not matter that temporary
voices are created and then discarded. These implicitly created
voices are given the settings equivalent to the effect of the
\voiceOne ... \voiceFour commands, in the order in
which they appear in the code.
In the following example, the intermediate voice has stems up, therefore we enter it in the third place, so it becomes voice three, which has the stems up as desired. Spacer rests are used to avoid printing doubled rests.
<<
{ r8 g g g g f16 ees f8 d }
\\
{ ees,8 r ees r d r d r }
\\
{ d'8 s c s bes s a s }
>>
In all but the simplest works it is advisable to create explicit
Voice contexts as explained in
Contexts and engravers and
Explicitly instantiating voices.
Identical rhythms
In the special case that we want to typeset parallel pieces of music
that have the same rhythm, we can combine them into a single
Voice context, thus forming chords. To achieve this, enclose
them in a simple simultaneous music construct within an explicit voice:
\new Voice <<
{ e4 f8 d e16 f g8 d4 }
{ c4 d8 b c16 d e8 b4 }
>>
This method leads to strange beamings and warnings if the pieces of music do not have the same rhythm.
Predefined commands
\voiceOne,
\voiceTwo,
\voiceThree,
\voiceFour,
\oneVoice.
See also
Learning Manual: Voices contain music, Explicitly instantiating voices.
Notation Reference: Percussion staves, Invisible rests, Stems.
Snippets: Simultaneous notes.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Single-staff polyphony ] | [ Up : Multiple voices ] | [ Collision resolution > ] | ||
Voice styles
Voices may be given distinct colors and shapes, allowing them to be easily identified:
<<
{ \voiceOneStyle d4 c2 b4 }
\\
{ \voiceTwoStyle e,2 e }
\\
{ \voiceThreeStyle b2. c4 }
\\
{ \voiceFourStyle g'2 g }
>>
The \voiceNeutralstyle command is used to revert to the
standard presentation.
Predefined commands
\voiceOneStyle,
\voiceTwoStyle,
\voiceThreeStyle,
\voiceFourStyle,
\voiceNeutralStyle.
See also
Learning Manual: I'm hearing Voices, Other sources of information.
Snippets: Simultaneous notes.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Voice styles ] | [ Up : Multiple voices ] | [ Automatic part combining > ] | ||
Collision resolution
The note heads of notes in different voices with the same pitch, same note head and opposite stem direction are automatically merged, but notes with different note heads or the same stem direction are not. Rests opposite a stem in a different voice are shifted vertically.
<<
{
c8 d e d c d c4
g'2 fis
} \\ {
c2 c8. b16 c4
e,2 r
} \\ {
\oneVoice
s1
e8 a b c d2
}
>>
Notes with different note heads may be merged, with the exception of half-note heads and quarter-note heads:
<<
{
\mergeDifferentlyHeadedOn
c8 d e d c d c4
g'2 fis
} \\ {
c2 c8. b16 c4
e,2 r
} \\ {
\oneVoice
s1
e8 a b c d2
}
>>
Note heads with different dots may be merged:
<<
{
\mergeDifferentlyHeadedOn
\mergeDifferentlyDottedOn
c8 d e d c d c4
g'2 fis
} \\ {
c2 c8. b16 c4
e,2 r
} \\ {
\oneVoice
s1
e8 a b c d2
}
>>
The half note and eighth note at the start of the second measure
are incorrectly merged because \mergeDifferentlyHeadedOn
cannot successfully complete the merge when three or more notes
line up in the same column, and in this case a warning is given.
To allow the merge to work properly a \shift must be applied
to the note that should not be merged. Here, \shiftOn is
applied to move the top g out of the column, and
\mergeDifferentlyHeadedOn then works properly.
<<
{
\mergeDifferentlyHeadedOn
\mergeDifferentlyDottedOn
c8 d e d c d c4
\shiftOn
g'2 fis
} \\ {
c2 c8. b16 c4
e,2 r
} \\ {
\oneVoice
s1
e8 a b c d2
}
>>
The \shiftOn, \shiftOnn, and \shiftOnnn
commands specify the degree to which chords of the current voice
should be shifted. The outer voices (normally: voices one and
two) have \shiftOff, while the inner voices (three and
four) have \shiftOn. \shiftOnn and
\shiftOnnn define further shift levels.
Notes are only merged if they have opposing stem directions (e.g. in
Voice 1 and 2).
Predefined commands
\mergeDifferentlyDottedOn,
\mergeDifferentlyDottedOff,
\mergeDifferentlyHeadedOn,
\mergeDifferentlyHeadedOff.
\shiftOn,
\shiftOnn,
\shiftOnnn,
\shiftOff.
Selected Snippets
Additional voices to avoid collisions
In some instances of complex polyphonic music, additional voices are
necessary to prevent collisions between notes. If more than four
parallel voices are needed, additional voices can be added by defining
a variable using the Scheme function context-spec-music.
voiceFive = #(context-spec-music (make-voice-props-set 4) 'Voice)
\relative c'' {
\time 3/4 \key d \minor \partial 2
<<
{ \voiceOne
a4. a8
e'4 e4. e8
f4 d4. c8
} \\ {
\voiceThree
f,2
bes4 a2
a4 s2
} \\ {
\voiceFive
s2
g4 g2
f4 f2
} \\ {
\voiceTwo
d2
d4 cis2
d4 bes2
}
>>
}
Forcing horizontal shift of notes
When the typesetting engine cannot cope, the following syntax can be used to override typesetting decisions. The units of measure used here are staff spaces.
\relative c' <<
{
<d g>2 <d g>
}
\\
{
<b f'>2
\once \override NoteColumn #'force-hshift = #1.7
<b f'>2
}
>>
See also
Music Glossary: polyphony.
Learning Manual: Multiple notes at once, Voices contain music, Collisions of objects.
Snippets: Simultaneous notes.
Internals Reference: NoteColumn, NoteCollision, RestCollision.
Known issues and warnings
When using \mergeDifferentlyHeadedOn with an upstem eighth
or a shorter note, and a downstem half note, the eighth note stem
gets a slightly wrong offset because of the different width of the
half note head symbol.
There is no support for chords where the same note occurs with different accidentals in the same chord. In this case, it is recommended to use enharmonic transcription, or to use special cluster notation (see Clusters).
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Collision resolution ] | [ Up : Multiple voices ] | [ Writing music in parallel > ] | ||
Automatic part combining
Automatic part combining is used to merge two parts of music onto a staff. It is aimed at typesetting orchestral scores. When the two parts are identical for a period of time, only one is shown. In places where the two parts differ, they are typeset as separate voices, and stem directions are set automatically. Also, solo and a due parts are identified and marked by default.
The syntax for part combining is:
\partcombine musicexpr1 musicexpr2
The following example demonstrates the basic functionality of the part combiner: putting parts on one staff and setting stem directions and polyphony. The same variables are used for the independent parts and the combined staff.
instrumentOne = \relative c' {
c4 d e f
R1
d'4 c b a
b4 g2 f4
e1
}
instrumentTwo = \relative g' {
R1
g4 a b c
d c b a
g f( e) d
e1
}
<<
\new Staff \instrumentOne
\new Staff \instrumentTwo
\new Staff \partcombine \instrumentOne \instrumentTwo
>>
The notes in the third measure appear only once, although they were
specified in both parts. Stem, slur, and tie directions are set
automatically, depending whether there is a solo or unison. When
needed in polyphony situations, the first part (with context called
one) always gets up stems, while the second (called two)
always gets down stems. In solo situations, the first and second
parts get marked with ‘Solo’ and ‘Solo II’, respectively. The
unisono (a due) parts are marked by default with the text
“a2”.
Both arguments to \partcombine will be interpreted as
Voice contexts. If using relative octaves,
\relative should be specified for both music expressions,
i.e.,
\partcombine \relative … musicexpr1 \relative … musicexpr2
A \relative section that is outside of \partcombine
has no effect on the pitches of musicexpr1 and
musicexpr2.
Selected Snippets
Combining two parts on the same staff
The part combiner tool ( \partcombine command ) allows the
combination of several different parts on the same staff. Text
directions such as "solo" or "a2" are added by default; to remove
them, simply set the property printPartCombineTexts to
"false". For vocal scores (hymns), there is no need to add
"solo"/"a2" texts, so they should be switched off. However, it
might be better not to use it if there are any solos, as they won’t be
indicated. In such cases, standard polyphonic notation may be
preferable.
This snippet presents the three ways two parts can be printed on a same
staff: standard polyphony, \partcombine without texts, and
\partcombine with texts.
musicUp = \relative c'' {
\time 4/4
a4 c4.( g8) a4 |
g4 e' g,( a8 b) |
c b a2.
}
musicDown = \relative c'' {
g4 e4.( d8) c4 |
r2 g'4( f8 e) |
d2 \stemDown a
}
\score {
<<
<<
\new Staff {
\set Staff.instrumentName = "Standard polyphony "
<< \musicUp \\ \musicDown >>
}
\new Staff \with { printPartCombineTexts = ##f } {
\set Staff.instrumentName = "PartCombine without texts "
\partcombine \musicUp \musicDown
}
\new Staff {
\set Staff.instrumentName = "PartCombine with texts "
\partcombine \musicUp \musicDown
}
>>
>>
\layout {
indent = 6.0\cm
\context {
\Score
\override SystemStartBar #'collapse-height = #30
}
}
}
Changing partcombine texts
When using the automatic part combining feature, the printed text for the solo and unison sections may be changed:
\new Staff <<
\set Staff.soloText = #"girl"
\set Staff.soloIIText = #"boy"
\set Staff.aDueText = #"together"
\partcombine
\relative c'' {
g4 g r r
a2 g
}
\relative c'' {
r4 r a( b)
a2 g
}
>>
See also
Notation Reference: Writing parts.
Snippets: Simultaneous notes.
Internals Reference: PartCombineMusic, Voice.
Known issues and warnings
\partcombine can only accept two voices.
When printPartCombineTexts is set, if the two voices play
the same notes on and off, the part combiner may typeset a2
more than once in a measure.
\partcombine cannot be inside \times.
\partcombine cannot be inside \relative.
Internally, the \partcombine interprets both arguments as
Voices and decides when the parts can be combined. When they have
different durations they cannot be combined and are given the names
one and two. Consequently, if the arguments switch to
differently named
Voice contexts, the events in those will
be ignored. Likewise, partcombining isn’t designed to work with lyrics;
when one of the voices is explicitly named in order to attach lyrics to
it, the partcombining stops working.
\partcombine only observes onset times of notes. It cannot
determine whether a previously started note is playing or not, leading
to various problems.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Automatic part combining ] | [ Up : Multiple voices ] | [ Staff notation > ] | ||
Writing music in parallel
Music for multiple parts can be interleaved in input code. The
function \parallelMusic accepts a list with the names of a
number of variables to be created, and a musical expression. The
content of alternate measures from the expression become the value
of the respective variables, so you can use them afterwards to
print the music.
|
Note: Bar checks |
\parallelMusic #'(voiceA voiceB voiceC) {
% Bar 1
r8 g'16 c'' e'' g' c'' e'' r8 g'16 c'' e'' g' c'' e'' |
r16 e'8.~ e'4 r16 e'8.~ e'4 |
c'2 c'2 |
% Bar 2
r8 a'16 d'' f'' a' d'' f'' r8 a'16 d'' f'' a' d'' f'' |
r16 d'8.~ d'4 r16 d'8.~ d'4 |
c'2 c'2 |
}
\new StaffGroup <<
\new Staff << \voiceA \\ \voiceB >>
\new Staff { \clef bass \voiceC }
>>
Relative mode may be used. Note that the \relative command
is not used inside \parallelMusic itself. The notes are
relative to the preceding note in the voice, not to the previous
note in the input – in other words, relative notes for
voiceA ignore the notes in voiceB.
\parallelMusic #'(voiceA voiceB voiceC) {
% Bar 1
r8 g16 c e g, c e r8 g,16 c e g, c e |
r16 e8.~ e4 r16 e8.~ e4 |
c2 c |
% Bar 2
r8 a,16 d f a, d f r8 a,16 d f a, d f |
r16 d8.~ d4 r16 d8.~ d4 |
c2 c |
}
\new StaffGroup <<
\new Staff << \relative c'' \voiceA \\ \relative c' \voiceB >>
\new Staff \relative c' { \clef bass \voiceC }
>>
This works quite well for piano music. This example maps four consecutive measures to four variables:
global = {
\key g \major
\time 2/4
}
\parallelMusic #'(voiceA voiceB voiceC voiceD) {
% Bar 1
a8 b c d |
d4 e |
c16 d e fis d e fis g |
a4 a |
% Bar 2
e8 fis g a |
fis4 g |
e16 fis g a fis g a b |
a4 a |
% Bar 3 ...
}
\score {
\new PianoStaff <<
\new Staff {
\global
<<
\relative c'' \voiceA
\\
\relative c' \voiceB
>>
}
\new Staff {
\global \clef bass
<<
\relative c \voiceC
\\
\relative c \voiceD
>>
}
>>
}
See also
Learning Manual: Organizing pieces with variables.
Snippets: Simultaneous notes.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Writing music in parallel ] | [ Up : Musical notation ] | [ Displaying staves > ] | ||
1.6 Staff notation
This section explains how to influence the appearance of staves, how to print scores with more than one staff, and how to add tempo indications and cue notes to staves.
| 1.6.1 Displaying staves | ||
| 1.6.2 Modifying single staves | ||
| 1.6.3 Writing parts |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Staff notation ] | [ Up : Staff notation ] | [ Instantiating new staves > ] | ||
1.6.1 Displaying staves
This section describes the different methods of creating and grouping staves.
| Instantiating new staves | ||
| Grouping staves | ||
| Nested staff groups |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Displaying staves ] | [ Up : Displaying staves ] | [ Grouping staves > ] | ||
Instantiating new staves
Staves (singular: staff) are created with
the \new or \context commands. For details, see
Creating contexts.
The basic staff context is Staff:
\new Staff { c4 d e f }
The DrumStaff context creates a five-line staff set up for
a typical drum set. Each instrument is shown with a different
symbol. The instruments are entered in drum mode following a
\drummode command, with each instrument specified by name.
For details, see Percussion staves.
\new DrumStaff {
\drummode { cymc hh ss tomh }
}
RhythmicStaff creates a single-line staff that only
displays the rhythmic values of the input. Real durations are
preserved. For details, see Showing melody rhythms.
\new RhythmicStaff { c4 d e f }
TabStaff creates a tablature with six strings in standard
guitar tuning. For details, see Default tablatures.
\new TabStaff { c4 d e f }
There are two staff contexts specific for the notation of ancient
music: MensuralStaff and VaticanaStaff. They are
described in Pre-defined contexts.
The GregorianTranscriptionStaff context creates a staff to
notate modern Gregorian chant. It does not show bar lines.
\new GregorianTranscriptionStaff { c4 d e f e d }
New single staff contexts may be defined. For details, see Defining new contexts.
See also
Music Glossary: staff, staves.
Notation Reference: Creating contexts, Percussion staves, Showing melody rhythms, Default tablatures, Pre-defined contexts, Staff symbol, Gregorian chant contexts, Mensural contexts, Defining new contexts.
Snippets: Staff notation.
Internals Reference: Staff, DrumStaff, GregorianTranscriptionStaff, RhythmicStaff, TabStaff, MensuralStaff, VaticanaStaff, StaffSymbol.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Instantiating new staves ] | [ Up : Displaying staves ] | [ Nested staff groups > ] | ||
Grouping staves
Various contexts exist to group single staves together in order to form multi-stave systems. Each grouping context sets the style of the system start delimiter and the behavior of bar lines.
If no context is specified, the default properties will be used: the group is started with a vertical line, and the bar lines are not connected.
<<
\new Staff { c1 c }
\new Staff { c1 c }
>>
In the StaffGroup context, the group is started with a
bracket and bar lines are drawn through all the staves.
\new StaffGroup <<
\new Staff { c1 c }
\new Staff { c1 c }
>>
In a ChoirStaff, the group starts with a bracket, but bar
lines are not connected.
\new ChoirStaff <<
\new Staff { c1 c }
\new Staff { c1 c }
>>
In a GrandStaff, the group begins with a brace, and bar
lines are connected between the staves.
\new GrandStaff <<
\new Staff { c1 c }
\new Staff { c1 c }
>>
The PianoStaff is identical to a GrandStaff, except
that it supports printing the instrument name directly. For
details, see Instrument names.
\new PianoStaff <<
\set PianoStaff.instrumentName = #"Piano"
\new Staff { c1 c }
\new Staff { c1 c }
>>
Each staff group context sets the property
systemStartDelimiter to one of the following values:
SystemStartBar, SystemStartBrace, or
SystemStartBracket. A fourth delimiter,
SystemStartSquare, is also available, but it must be
explicitly specified.
New staff group contexts may be defined. For details, see Defining new contexts.
Selected Snippets
Use square bracket at the start of a staff group
The system start delimiter SystemStartSquare can be used by
setting it explicitly in a StaffGroup or ChoirStaffGroup
context.
\score {
\new StaffGroup { <<
\set StaffGroup.systemStartDelimiter = #'SystemStartSquare
\new Staff { c'4 d' e' f' }
\new Staff { c'4 d' e' f' }
>> }
}
Display bracket with only one staff in a system
If there is only one staff in one of the staff types ChoirStaff
or StaffGroup, the bracket and the starting bar line will not be
displayed as standard behavior. This can be changed by overriding the
relevant properties.
Note that in contexts such as PianoStaff and GrandStaff
where the systems begin with a brace instead of a bracket, another
property has to be set, as shown on the second system in the example.
\markup \left-column {
\score {
\new StaffGroup <<
% Must be lower than the actual number of staff lines
\override StaffGroup.SystemStartBracket #'collapse-height = #1
\override Score.SystemStartBar #'collapse-height = #1
\new Staff {
c'1
}
>>
\layout { }
}
\null
\score {
\new PianoStaff <<
\override PianoStaff.SystemStartBrace #'collapse-height = #1
\override Score.SystemStartBar #'collapse-height = #1
\new Staff {
c'1
}
>>
\layout { }
}
}
Mensurstriche layout (bar lines between the staves)
The mensurstriche-layout where the bar lines do not show on the staves
but between staves can be achieved with a StaffGroup instead of
a ChoirStaff. The bar line on staves is blanked out by setting
the transparent property.
global = {
\override Staff.BarLine #'transparent = ##t
s1 s
% the final bar line is not interrupted
\revert Staff.BarLine #'transparent
\bar "|."
}
\new StaffGroup \relative c'' {
<<
\new Staff { << \global { c1 c } >> }
\new Staff { << \global { c c } >> }
>>
}
See also
Music Glossary: brace, bracket, grand staff.
Notation Reference: Instrument names, Defining new contexts.
Snippets: Staff notation.
Internals Reference: Staff, StaffGroup, ChoirStaff, GrandStaff, PianoStaff, SystemStartBar, SystemStartBrace, SystemStartBracket, SystemStartSquare.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Grouping staves ] | [ Up : Displaying staves ] | [ Modifying single staves > ] | ||
Nested staff groups
Staff-group contexts can be nested to arbitrary depths. In this case, each child context creates a new bracket adjacent to the bracket of its parent group.
\new StaffGroup <<
\new Staff { c2 c | c2 c }
\new StaffGroup <<
\new Staff { g2 g | g2 g }
\new StaffGroup \with {
systemStartDelimiter = #'SystemStartSquare
}
<<
\new Staff { e2 e | e2 e }
\new Staff { c2 c | c2 c }
>>
>>
>>
New nested staff group contexts can be defined. For details, see Defining new contexts.
Selected Snippets
Nesting staves
The property systemStartDelimiterHierarchy can be used to make
more complex nested staff groups. The command \set
StaffGroup.systemStartDelimiterHierarchy takes an alphabetical list of
the number of staves produced. Before each staff a system start
delimiter can be given. It has to be enclosed in brackets and takes as
much staves as the brackets enclose. Elements in the list can be
omitted, but the first bracket takes always the complete number of
staves. The possibilities are SystemStartBar,
SystemStartBracket, SystemStartBrace, and
SystemStartSquare.
\new StaffGroup
\relative c'' <<
\set StaffGroup.systemStartDelimiterHierarchy
= #'(SystemStartSquare (SystemStartBrace (SystemStartBracket a
(SystemStartSquare b) ) c ) d)
\new Staff { c1 }
\new Staff { c1 }
\new Staff { c1 }
\new Staff { c1 }
\new Staff { c1 }
>>
See also
Notation Reference: Grouping staves, Instrument names, Defining new contexts.
Snippets: Staff notation.
Internals Reference: StaffGroup, ChoirStaff, SystemStartBar, SystemStartBrace, SystemStartBracket, SystemStartSquare.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Nested staff groups ] | [ Up : Staff notation ] | [ Staff symbol > ] | ||
1.6.2 Modifying single staves
This section explains how to change specific attributes of one staff: for example, modifying the number of staff lines or the staff size. Methods to start and stop staves and set ossia sections are also described.
| Staff symbol | ||
| Ossia staves | ||
| Hiding staves |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Modifying single staves ] | [ Up : Modifying single staves ] | [ Ossia staves > ] | ||
Staff symbol
The lines of a staff belong to the StaffSymbol grob.
StaffSymbol properties can be modified to change the
appearance of a staff, but they must be modified before the staff
is created.
The number of staff lines may be changed. The clef position and the position of middle C may need to be modified to fit the new staff. For an explanation, refer to the snippet section in Clef.
\new Staff \with {
\override StaffSymbol #'line-count = #3
}
{ d4 d d d }
Staff line thickness can be modified. The thickness of ledger lines and stems are also affected, since they depend on staff line thickness.
\new Staff \with {
\override StaffSymbol #'thickness = #3
}
{ e4 d c b }
Ledger line thickness can be set independently of staff line thickness. In the example the two numbers are factors multiplying the staff line thickness and the staff line spacing. The two contributions are added to give the ledger line thickness.
\new Staff \with {
\override StaffSymbol #'ledger-line-thickness = #'(1 . 0.2)
}
{ e4 d c b }
The distance between staff lines can be changed. This setting affects the spacing of ledger lines as well.
\new Staff \with {
\override StaffSymbol #'staff-space = #1.5
}
{ a4 b c d }
Further details about the properties of StaffSymbol can be
found in
staff-symbol-interface.
Modifications to staff properties in the middle of a score can be
placed between \stopStaff and \startStaff:
c2 c \stopStaff \override Staff.StaffSymbol #'line-count = #2 \startStaff b2 b \stopStaff \revert Staff.StaffSymbol #'line-count \startStaff a2 a
In general, \startStaff and \stopStaff can be used
to stop or start a staff in the middle of a score.
c4 b a2 \stopStaff b4 c d2 \startStaff e4 d c2
Predefined commands
\startStaff,
\stopStaff.
Selected Snippets
Making some staff lines thicker than the others
For pedagogical purposes, a staff line can be thickened (e.g., the
middle line, or to emphasize the line of the G clef). This can be
achieved by adding extra lines very close to the line that should be
emphasized, using the line-positions property of the
StaffSymbol object.
{
\override Staff.StaffSymbol #'line-positions = #'(-4 -2 -0.2 0 0.2 2 4)
d'4 e' f' g'
}
See also
Music Glossary: line, ledger line, staff.
Notation Reference: Clef.
Snippets: Staff notation.
Internals Reference: StaffSymbol, staff-symbol-interface.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Staff symbol ] | [ Up : Modifying single staves ] | [ Hiding staves > ] | ||
Ossia staves
Ossia staves can be set by creating a new simultaneous staff in the appropriate location:
\new Staff \relative c'' {
c4 b d c
<<
{ c4 b d c }
\new Staff { e4 d f e }
>>
c4 b c2
}
However, the above example is not what is usually desired. To create ossia staves that are above the original staff, have no time signature or clef, and have a smaller font size, tweaks must be used. The Learning Manual describes a specific technique to achieve this goal, beginning with Nesting music expressions.
The following example uses the alignAboveContext property
to align the ossia staff. This method is most appropriate when
only a few ossia staves are needed.
\new Staff = main \relative c'' {
c4 b d c
<<
{ c4 b d c }
\new Staff \with {
\remove "Time_signature_engraver"
alignAboveContext = #"main"
fontSize = #-3
\override StaffSymbol #'staff-space = #(magstep -3)
\override StaffSymbol #'thickness = #(magstep -3)
firstClef = ##f
}
{ e4 d f e }
>>
c4 b c2
}
If many isolated ossia staves are needed, creating an empty
Staff context with a specific context id may be more
appropriate; the ossia staves may then be created by
calling this context and using \startStaff and
\stopStaff at the desired locations. The benefits of this
method are more apparent if the piece is longer than the following
example.
<<
\new Staff = ossia \with {
\remove "Time_signature_engraver"
\override Clef #'transparent = ##t
fontSize = #-3
\override StaffSymbol #'staff-space = #(magstep -3)
\override StaffSymbol #'thickness = #(magstep -3)
}
{ \stopStaff s1*6 }
\new Staff \relative c' {
c4 b c2
<<
{ e4 f e2 }
\context Staff = ossia {
\startStaff e4 g8 f e2 \stopStaff
}
>>
g4 a g2 \break
c4 b c2
<<
{ g4 a g2 }
\context Staff = ossia {
\startStaff g4 e8 f g2 \stopStaff
}
>>
e4 d c2
}
>>
Using the \RemoveEmptyStaffContext command to create ossia
staves may be used as an alternative. This method is most
convenient when ossia staves occur immediately following a line
break. In this case, spacer rests do not need to be used at all;
only \startStaff and \stopStaff are necessary. For
more information about \RemoveEmptyStaffContext, see
Hiding staves.
<<
\new Staff = ossia \with {
\remove "Time_signature_engraver"
\override Clef #'transparent = ##t
fontSize = #-3
\override StaffSymbol #'staff-space = #(magstep -3)
\override StaffSymbol #'thickness = #(magstep -3)
}
\new Staff \relative c' {
c4 b c2
e4 f e2
g4 a g2 \break
<<
{ c4 b c2 }
\context Staff = ossia {
c4 e8 d c2 \stopStaff
}
>>
g4 a g2
e4 d c2
}
>>
\layout {
\context {
\RemoveEmptyStaffContext
\override VerticalAxisGroup #'remove-first = ##t
}
}
Selected Snippets
Vertically aligning ossias and lyrics
This snippet demonstrates the use of the context properties
alignBelowContext and alignAboveContext to control the
positioning of lyrics and ossias.
\paper {
ragged-right = ##t
}
\relative c' <<
\new Staff = "1" { c4 c s2 }
\new Staff = "2" { c4 c s2 }
\new Staff = "3" { c4 c s2 }
{ \skip 2
<<
\lyrics {
\set alignBelowContext = #"1"
lyrics4 below
}
\new Staff \with {
alignAboveContext = #"3"
fontSize = #-2
\override StaffSymbol #'staff-space = #(magstep -2)
\remove "Time_signature_engraver"
} {
\times 4/6 {
\override TextScript #'padding = #3
c8[^"ossia above" d e d e f]
}
}
>>
}
>>
See also
Music Glossary: ossia, staff, Frenched staff.
Learning Manual: Nesting music expressions, Size of objects, Length and thickness of objects.
Notation Reference: Hiding staves.
Snippets: Staff notation.
Internals Reference: StaffSymbol.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Ossia staves ] | [ Up : Modifying single staves ] | [ Writing parts > ] | ||
Hiding staves
Staff lines can be hidden by removing the
Staff_symbol_engraver from the Staff context. As an
alternative, \stopStaff may be used.
\new Staff \with {
\remove "Staff_symbol_engraver"
}
\relative c''' { a8 f e16 d c b a2 }
Empty staves can be hidden by setting the
\RemoveEmptyStaffContext command in the \layout
block. In orchestral scores, this style is known as ‘Frenched
Score’. By default, this command hides and removes all empty
staves in a score except for those in the first system.
|
Note: A staff is considered empty when it contains only multi-measure rests, skips, spacer rests, or a combination of these elements. |
\layout {
\context {
\RemoveEmptyStaffContext
}
}
\relative c' <<
\new Staff {
e4 f g a \break
b1 \break
a4 b c2
}
\new Staff {
c,4 d e f \break
R1 \break
f4 g c,2
}
>>
\RemoveEmptyStaffContext can also be used to create ossia
sections for a staff. For details, see Ossia staves.
The \AncientRemoveEmptyStaffContext command may be used to
hide empty staves in ancient music contexts. Similarly,
\RemoveEmptyRhythmicStaffContext may be used to hide empty
RhythmicStaff contexts.
Predefined commands
\RemoveEmptyStaffContext,
\AncientRemoveEmptyStaffContext,
\RemoveEmptyRhythmicStaffContext.
Selected Snippets
Removing the first empty line
The first empty staff can also be removed from the score by setting the
VerticalAxisGroup property remove-first. This can be done
globally inside the \layout block, or locally inside the
specific staff that should be removed. In the latter case, you have to
specify the context (Staff applies only to the current staff) in
front of the property.
The lower staff of the second staff group is not removed, because the setting applies only to the specific staff inside of which it is written.
\layout {
\context {
\RemoveEmptyStaffContext
% To use the setting globally, uncomment the following line:
% \override VerticalAxisGroup #'remove-first = ##t
}
}
\new StaffGroup <<
\new Staff \relative c' {
e4 f g a \break
c1
}
\new Staff {
% To use the setting globally, comment this line,
% uncomment the line in the \layout block above
\override Staff.VerticalAxisGroup #'remove-first = ##t
R1 \break
R
}
>>
\new StaffGroup <<
\new Staff \relative c' {
e4 f g a \break
c1
}
\new Staff {
R1 \break
R
}
>>
See also
Music Glossary: Frenched staff.
Notation Reference: Staff symbol, Ossia staves.
Snippets: Staff notation.
Internals Reference: ChordNames, FiguredBass, Lyrics, Staff, VerticalAxisGroup, Staff_symbol_engraver.
Known issues and warnings
Removing Staff_symbol_engraver also hides bar lines. If
bar line visibility is forced, formatting errors may occur. In
this case, use the following overrides instead of removing the
engraver:
\override StaffSymbol #'stencil = ##f \override NoteHead #'no-ledgers = ##t
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Hiding staves ] | [ Up : Staff notation ] | [ Metronome marks > ] | ||
1.6.3 Writing parts
This section explains how to insert tempo indications and instrument names into a score. Methods to quote other voices and format cue notes are also described.
| Metronome marks | ||
| Instrument names | ||
| Quoting other voices | ||
| Formatting cue notes |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Writing parts ] | [ Up : Writing parts ] | [ Instrument names > ] | ||
Metronome marks
A basic metronome mark is simple to write:
\tempo 4 = 120 c2 d e4. d8 c2
Tempo indications with text can be used instead:
\tempo "Allegretto" c4 e d c b4. a16 b c4 r4
Combining a metronome mark and text will automatically place the metronome mark within parentheses:
\tempo "Allegro" 4 = 160 g4 c d e d4 b g2
In general, the text can be any markup object:
\tempo \markup { \italic Faster } 4 = 132
a8-. r8 b-. r gis-. r a-. r
A parenthesized metronome mark with no textual indication may be written by including an empty string in the input:
\tempo "" 8 = 96 d4 g e c
Selected Snippets
Printing metronome and rehearsal marks below the staff
By default, metronome and rehearsal marks are printed above the staff.
To place them below the staff simply set the direction property
of MetronomeMark or RehearsalMark appropriately.
\layout { ragged-right = ##f }
{
% Metronome marks below the staff
\override Score.MetronomeMark #'direction = #DOWN
\tempo 8. = 120
c''1
% Rehearsal marks below the staff
\override Score.RehearsalMark #'direction = #DOWN
\mark \default
c''1
}
Changing the tempo without a metronome mark
To change the tempo in MIDI output without printing anything, make the metronome mark invisible.
\score {
\new Staff \relative c' {
\tempo 4 = 160
c4 e g b
c4 b d c
\set Score.tempoHideNote = ##t
\tempo 4 = 96
d,4 fis a cis
d4 cis e d
}
\layout { }
\midi { }
}
Creating metronome marks in markup mode
New metronome marks can be created in markup mode, but they will not change the tempo in MIDI output.
\relative c' {
\tempo \markup {
\concat {
(
\smaller \general-align #Y #DOWN \note #"16." #1
" = "
\smaller \general-align #Y #DOWN \note #"8" #1
)
}
}
c1
c4 c' c,2
}
For more details, see Formatting text.
See also
Music Glossary: metronome, metronomic indication, tempo indication, metronome mark.
Notation Reference: Formatting text, MIDI output.
Snippets: Staff notation.
Internals Reference: MetronomeMark.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Metronome marks ] | [ Up : Writing parts ] | [ Quoting other voices > ] | ||
Instrument names
Instrument names can be printed on the left side of staves in the
Staff and PianoStaff contexts. The value of
instrumentName is used for the first staff, and the value
of shortInstrumentName is used for all succeeding staves.
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Violin " \set Staff.shortInstrumentName = #"Vln " c4.. g'16 c4.. g'16 \break c1
Markup mode can be used to create more complicated instrument names:
\set Staff.instrumentName = \markup {
\column { "Clarinetti"
\line { "in B" \smaller \flat } } }
c4 c,16 d e f g2
When two or more staff contexts are grouped together, the
instrument names and short instrument names are centered by
default. To center multi-line instrument names,
\center-column must be used:
<<
\new Staff {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Flute"
f2 g4 f
}
\new Staff {
\set Staff.instrumentName = \markup \center-column {
Clarinet
\line { "in B" \smaller \flat }
}
c4 b c2
}
>>
However, if the instrument names are longer, the instrument names
in a staff group may not be centered unless the indent and
short-indent settings are increased. For details about
these settings, see Horizontal dimensions.
\layout {
indent = 3.0\cm
short-indent = 1.5\cm
}
\relative c'' <<
\new Staff {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Alto Flute in G"
\set Staff.shortInstrumentName = #"Fl."
f2 g4 f \break
g4 f g2
}
\new Staff {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"Clarinet"
\set Staff.shortInstrumentName = #"Clar."
c,4 b c2 \break
c2 b4 c
}
>>
To add instrument names to other contexts (such as
GrandStaff, ChoirStaff, or StaffGroup),
Instrument_name_engraver must be added to that context.
For details, see Modifying context plug-ins.
Instrument names may be changed in the middle of a piece:
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"First" \set Staff.shortInstrumentName = #"one" c1 c c c \break c1 c c c \break \set Staff.instrumentName = #"Second" \set Staff.shortInstrumentName = #"two" c1 c c c \break c1 c c c \break
If an instrument switch is needed,
\addInstrumentDefinition may be used in combination with
\instrumentSwitch to create a detailed list of the
necessary changes for the switch. The
\addInstrumentDefinition command has two arguments: an
identifying string, and an association list of context properties
and values to be used for the instrument. It must be placed in
the toplevel scope. \instrumentSwitch is used in the music
expression to declare the instrument switch:
\addInstrumentDefinition #"contrabassoon"
#`((instrumentTransposition . ,(ly:make-pitch -1 0 0))
(shortInstrumentName . "Cbsn.")
(clefGlyph . "clefs.F")
(middleCPosition . 6)
(clefPosition . 2)
(instrumentCueName . ,(make-bold-markup "cbsn."))
(midiInstrument . "bassoon"))
\new Staff \with {
instrumentName = #"Bassoon"
}
\relative c' {
\clef tenor
\compressFullBarRests
c2 g'
R1*16
\instrumentSwitch "contrabassoon"
c,,2 g \break
c,1 ~ | c1
}
See also
Notation Reference: Horizontal dimensions, Modifying context plug-ins.
Snippets: Staff notation.
Internals Reference: InstrumentName, PianoStaff, Staff.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Instrument names ] | [ Up : Writing parts ] | [ Formatting cue notes > ] | ||
Quoting other voices
It is very common for one voice to double some of the music from another voice. For example, the first and second violins may play the same notes during a passage of music. In LilyPond this is accomplished by letting one voice quote the other voice without having to re-enter it.
Before a part can be quoted, the \addQuote command must be used
to initialize the quoted fragment. This command must be used in the
toplevel scope. The first argument is an identifying string, and the
second is a music expression:
flute = \relative c'' {
a4 gis g gis
}
\addQuote "flute" { \flute }
The \quoteDuring command is used to indicate the point where the
quotation begins. It is followed by two arguments: the name of the
quoted voice, as defined with \addQuote, and a music expression
that indicates the duration of the quote, usually spacer rests or
multi-measure rests. The corresponding music from the quoted voice is
inserted into the music expression:
flute = \relative c'' {
a4 gis g gis
}
\addQuote "flute" { \flute }
\relative c' {
c4 cis \quoteDuring #"flute" { s2 }
}
If the music expression used for \quoteDuring contains
anything but a spacer rest or multi-measure rest, a polyphonic
situation is created, which is often not desirable:
flute = \relative c'' {
a4 gis g gis
}
\addQuote "flute" { \flute }
\relative c' {
c4 cis \quoteDuring #"flute" { c4 b }
}
Quotations recognize instrument transposition settings for both
the source and target instruments if the \transposition
command is used. For details about \transposition, see
Instrument transpositions.
clarinet = \relative c'' {
\transposition bes
a4 gis g gis
}
\addQuote "clarinet" { \clarinet }
\relative c' {
c4 cis \quoteDuring #"clarinet" { s2 }
}
It is possible to tag quotations with unique names in order to process them in different ways. For details about this procedure, see Using tags.
Selected Snippets
Quoting another voice with transposition
Quotations take into account the transposition of both source and
target. In this example, all instruments play sounding middle C; the
target is an instrument in F. The target part may be transposed using
\transpose. In this case, all the pitches (including the
quoted ones) are transposed.
\addQuote clarinet {
\transposition bes
\repeat unfold 8 { d'16 d' d'8 }
}
\addQuote sax {
\transposition es'
\repeat unfold 16 { a8 }
}
quoteTest = {
% french horn
\transposition f
g'4
<< \quoteDuring #"clarinet" { \skip 4 } s4^"clar." >>
<< \quoteDuring #"sax" { \skip 4 } s4^"sax." >>
g'4
}
{
\set Staff.instrumentName =
\markup {
\center-column { Horn \line { in F } }
}
\quoteTest
\transpose c' d' << \quoteTest s4_"up a tone" >>
}
Quoting another voice
The quotedEventTypes property determines the music event types
that are quoted. The default value is (note-event rest-event),
which means that only notes and rests of the quoted voice appear in the
\quoteDuring expression. In the following example, a 16th rest
is not quoted since rest-event is not in
quotedEventTypes.
quoteMe = \relative c' {
fis4 r16 a8.-> b4\ff c
}
\addQuote quoteMe \quoteMe
original = \relative c'' {
c8 d s2
\once \override NoteColumn #'ignore-collision = ##t
es8 gis8
}
<<
\new Staff {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"quoteMe"
\quoteMe
}
\new Staff {
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"orig"
\original
}
\new Staff \relative c'' <<
\set Staff.instrumentName = #"orig+quote"
\set Staff.quotedEventTypes =
#'(note-event articulation-event)
\original
\new Voice {
s4
\set fontSize = #-4
\override Stem #'length-fraction = #(magstep -4)
\quoteDuring #"quoteMe" { \skip 2. }
}
>>
>>
See also
Notation Reference: Instrument transpositions, Using tags.
Snippets: Staff notation.
Internals Reference: QuoteMusic, Voice.
Known issues and warnings
Only the contents of the first Voice occurring in an
\addQuote command will be considered for quotation, so
music cannot contain \new and \context Voice
statements that would switch to a different Voice.
Quoting grace notes is broken and can even cause LilyPond to crash.
Quoting nested triplets may result in poor notation.
In earlier versions of LilyPond (pre 2.11), addQuote was
written entirely in lower-case letters: \addquote.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Quoting other voices ] | [ Up : Writing parts ] | [ Editorial annotations > ] | ||
Formatting cue notes
The previous section explains how to create quotations. The
\cueDuring command is a more specialized form of
\quoteDuring, being particularly useful for inserting cue
notes into a part. The syntax is as follows:
\cueDuring #partname #voice music
This command copies the corresponding measures from partname
into a CueVoice context. The CueVoice is created
implicitly, and occurs simultaneously with music, which
creates a polyphonic situation. The voice argument
determines whether the cue notes should be notated as a first or
second voice; UP corresponds to the first voice, and
DOWN corresponds to the second.
oboe = \relative c'' {
r2 r8 d16 f e g f a
g8 g16 g g2.
}
\addQuote "oboe" { \oboe }
\new Voice \relative c'' {
\cueDuring #"oboe" #UP { R1 }
g2 c,
}
In the above example, the Voice context had to be
explicitly declared, or else the entire music expression would
belong to the CueVoice context.
The name of the cued instrument can be printed by setting the
instrumentCueName property in the CueVoice context.
oboe = \relative c''' {
g4 r8 e16 f e4 d
}
\addQuote "oboe" { \oboe }
\new Staff \relative c'' <<
\new CueVoice \with {
instrumentCueName = "ob."
}
\new Voice {
\cueDuring #"oboe" #UP { R1 }
g4. b8 d2
}
>>
In addition to printing the name of the cued instrument, when cue
notes end, the name of the original instrument should be printed,
and any other changes introduced by the cued part should be
undone. This can be accomplished by using
\addInstrumentDefinition and \instrumentSwitch. For
an example and explanation, see Instrument names.
The \killCues command removes cue notes from a music
expression. This can be useful if cue notes need to be removed
from a part but may be restored at a later time.
flute = \relative c''' {
r2 cis2 r2 dis2
}
\addQuote "flute" { \flute }
\new Voice \relative c'' {
\killCues {
\cueDuring #"flute" #UP { R1 }
g4. b8 d2
}
}
The \transposedCueDuring command is useful for adding
instrumental cues from a completely different register. The
syntax is similar to \cueDuring, but it requires one extra
argument to specify the transposition of the cued instrument. For
more information about transposition, see
Instrument transpositions.
piccolo = \relative c''' {
\clef "treble^8"
R1
c8 c c e g2
a4 g g2
}
\addQuote "piccolo" { \piccolo }
cbassoon = \relative c, {
\clef "bass_8"
c4 r g r
\transposedCueDuring #"piccolo" #UP c,, { R1 }
c4 r g r
}
<<
\new Staff = "piccolo" \piccolo
\new Staff = "cbassoon" \cbassoon
>>
It is possible to tag cued parts with unique names in order to process them in different ways. For details about this procedure, see Using tags.
See also
Notation Reference: Instrument transpositions, Instrument names, Using tags.
Snippets: Staff notation.
Internals Reference: CueVoice, Voice.
Known issues and warnings
Collisions can occur with rests, when using \cueDuring,
between Voice and CueVoice contexts.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Formatting cue notes ] | [ Up : Musical notation ] | [ Inside the staff > ] | ||
1.7 Editorial annotations
This section discusses the various ways to change the appearance of notes and add analysis or educational emphasis.
| 1.7.1 Inside the staff | ||
| 1.7.2 Outside the staff |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Editorial annotations ] | [ Up : Editorial annotations ] | [ Selecting notation font size > ] | ||
1.7.1 Inside the staff
This section discusses how to add emphasis to elements that are inside the staff.
| Selecting notation font size | ||
| Fingering instructions | ||
| Hidden notes | ||
| Coloring objects | ||
| Parentheses | ||
| Stems |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Inside the staff ] | [ Up : Inside the staff ] | [ Fingering instructions > ] | ||
Selecting notation font size
The font size of notation elements may be altered. It does not change the size of variable symbols, such as beams or slurs.
|
Note: For font sizes of text, see Selecting font and font size. |
\huge c4.-> d8---3 \large c4.-> d8---3 \normalsize c4.-> d8---3 \small c4.-> d8---3 \tiny c4.-> d8---3 \teeny c4.-> d8---3
Internally, this sets the fontSize property. This in turn
causes the font-size property to be set in all layout
objects. The value of font-size is a number indicating the
size relative to the standard size for the current staff height.
Each step up is an increase of approximately 12% of the font size.
Six steps is exactly a factor of two. The Scheme function
magstep converts a font-size number to a scaling
factor. The font-size property can also be set directly,
so that only certain layout objects are affected.
\set fontSize = #3 c4.-> d8---3 \override NoteHead #'font-size = #-4 c4.-> d8---3 \override Script #'font-size = #2 c4.-> d8---3 \override Stem #'font-size = #-5 c4.-> d8---3
Font size changes are achieved by scaling the design size that is
closest to the desired size. The standard font size (for
font-size = #0) depends on the standard staff height.
For a 20pt staff, a 10pt font is selected.
The font-size property can only be set on layout objects
that use fonts. These are the ones supporting the
font-interface layout interface.
Predefined commands
\teeny,
\tiny,
\small,
\normalsize,
\large,
\huge.
See also
Snippets: Editorial annotations.
Internals Reference: font-interface.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Selecting notation font size ] | [ Up : Inside the staff ] | [ Hidden notes > ] | ||
Fingering instructions
Fingering instructions can be entered using note-digit:
c4-1 d-2 f-4 e-3
Markup texts may be used for finger changes.
c4-1 d-2 f-4 c^\markup { \finger "2 - 3" }
A thumb-script can be added (e.g., in cello music) to indicate that a note should be played with the thumb.
<a_\thumb a'-3>2 <b_\thumb b'-3>
Fingerings for chords can also be added to individual notes of the chord by adding them after the pitches.
<c-1 e-2 g-3 b-5>2 <d-1 f-2 a-3 c-5>
Fingering instructions may be manually placed above or below the staff, see Direction and placement.
Selected Snippets
Controlling the placement of chord fingerings
The placement of fingering numbers can be controlled precisely.
\relative c' {
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(left)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>4
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(down)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>4
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(down right up)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>4
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(up)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>4
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(left)
<c-1>2
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(down)
<e-3>2
}
Allowing fingerings to be printed inside the staff
By default, vertically oriented fingerings are positioned outside the staff. However, this behavior can be canceled.
\relative c' {
<c-1 e-2 g-3 b-5>2
\once \override Fingering #'staff-padding = #'()
<c-1 e-2 g-3 b-5>2
}
Avoiding collisions with chord fingerings
Fingerings and string numbers applied to individual notes will automatically avoid beams and stems, but this is not true by default for fingerings and string numbers applied to the individual notes of chords. The following example shows how this default behavior can be overridden.
\relative c' {
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(up)
\set stringNumberOrientations = #'(up)
\set strokeFingerOrientations = #'(up)
% Default behavior
r8
<f c'-5>8
<f c'\5>8
<f c'-\rightHandFinger #2 >8
% Corrected to avoid collisions
r8
\override Fingering #'add-stem-support = ##t
<f c'-5>8
\override StringNumber #'add-stem-support = ##t
<f c'\5>8
\override StrokeFinger #'add-stem-support = ##t
<f c'-\rightHandFinger #2 >8
}
See also
Notation Reference: Direction and placement
Snippets: Editorial annotations.
Internals Reference: FingeringEvent, fingering-event, Fingering_engraver, New_fingering_engraver, Fingering.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Fingering instructions ] | [ Up : Inside the staff ] | [ Coloring objects > ] | ||
Hidden notes
Hidden (or invisible or transparent) notes can be useful in preparing theory or composition exercises.
c4 d \hideNotes e4 f \unHideNotes g a \hideNotes b \unHideNotes c
Notation objects which are attached to invisible notes are still visible.
c4( d) \hideNotes e4(\p f)--
Predefined commands
\hideNotes,
\unHideNotes.
See also
Snippets: Editorial annotations.
Internals Reference: Note_spacing_engraver, NoteSpacing.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Hidden notes ] | [ Up : Inside the staff ] | [ Parentheses > ] | ||
Coloring objects
Individual objects may be assigned colors. Valid color names are listed in the List of colors.
\override NoteHead #'color = #red c4 c \override NoteHead #'color = #(x11-color 'LimeGreen) d \override Stem #'color = #blue e
The full range of colors defined for X11 can be accessed by using
the Scheme function x11-color. The function takes one
argument; this can be a symbol in the form ’FooBar or a
string in the form "FooBar". The first form is quicker to
write and is more efficient. However, using the second form it is
possible to access X11 colors by the multi-word form of its name.
If x11-color cannot make sense of the parameter then the
color returned defaults to black.
\override Staff.StaffSymbol #'color = #(x11-color 'SlateBlue2)
\set Staff.instrumentName = \markup {
\with-color #(x11-color 'navy) "Clarinet"
}
gis8 a
\override Beam #'color = #(x11-color "medium turquoise")
gis a
\override Accidental #'color = #(x11-color 'DarkRed)
gis a
\override NoteHead #'color = #(x11-color "LimeGreen")
gis a
% this is deliberate nonsense; note that the stems remain black
\override Stem #'color = #(x11-color 'Boggle)
b2 cis
Exact RGB colors can be specified using the Scheme function
rgb-color.
\override Staff.StaffSymbol #'color = #(x11-color 'SlateBlue2)
\set Staff.instrumentName = \markup {
\with-color #(x11-color 'navy) "Clarinet"
}
\override Stem #'color = #(rgb-color 0 0 0)
gis8 a
\override Stem #'color = #(rgb-color 1 1 1)
gis8 a
\override Stem #'color = #(rgb-color 0 0 0.5)
gis4 a
See also
Notation Reference:
List of colors, The \tweak command.
Snippets: Editorial annotations.
Known issues and warnings
An X11 color is not necessarily exactly the same shade as a similarly named normal color.
Not all X11 colors are distinguishable in a web browser, i.e.,
a web browser might not display a difference between 'LimeGreen
and 'ForestGreen. For web use normal colors are recommended
(i.e., #blue, #green, #red).
Notes in a chord cannot be colored with \override; use
\tweak instead, see The \tweak command.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Coloring objects ] | [ Up : Inside the staff ] | [ Stems > ] | ||
Parentheses
Objects may be parenthesized by prefixing \parenthesize to
the music event. When prefixed to a chord, it parenthesizes every
note. Individual notes inside a chord may also be parenthesized.
c2 \parenthesize d c2 \parenthesize <c e g> c2 <c \parenthesize e g>
Non-note objects may be parenthesized as well. For articulations,
a hyphen is needed before the \parenthesize command.
c2-\parenthesize -. d c2 \parenthesize r
See also
Snippets: Editorial annotations.
Internals Reference: Parenthesis_engraver, ParenthesesItem, parentheses-interface.
Known issues and warnings
Parenthesizing a chord prints parentheses around each individual note, instead of a single large parenthesis around the entire chord.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Parentheses ] | [ Up : Inside the staff ] | [ Outside the staff > ] | ||
Stems
Whenever a note is found, a Stem object is created
automatically. For whole notes and rests, they are also created but
made invisible.
Predefined commands
\stemUp,
\stemDown,
\stemNeutral.
Selected Snippets
Default direction of stems on the center line of the staff
The default direction of stems on the center line of the staff is set
by the Stem property neutral-direction.
\relative c'' {
a4 b c b
\override Stem #'neutral-direction = #up
a4 b c b
\override Stem #'neutral-direction = #down
a4 b c b
}
See also
Notation Reference: Direction and placement.
Snippets: Editorial annotations.
Internals Reference: Stem_engraver, Stem, stem-interface.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Stems ] | [ Up : Editorial annotations ] | [ Balloon help > ] | ||
1.7.2 Outside the staff
This section discusses how to add emphasis to elements in the staff from outside of the staff.
| Balloon help | ||
| Grid lines | ||
| Analysis brackets |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Outside the staff ] | [ Up : Outside the staff ] | [ Grid lines > ] | ||
Balloon help
Elements of notation can be marked and named with the help of a square balloon. The primary purpose of this feature is to explain notation.
\new Voice \with { \consists "Balloon_engraver" }
{
\balloonGrobText #'Stem #'(3 . 4) \markup { "I'm a Stem" }
a8
\balloonGrobText #'Rest #'(-4 . -4) \markup { "I'm a rest" }
r
<c, g'-\balloonText #'(-2 . -2) \markup { "I'm a note head" } c>2.
}
There are two music functions, balloonGrobText and
balloonText; the former is used like
\once \override to attach text to any grob, and the
latter is used like \tweak, typically within chords, to
attach text to an individual note.
Balloon text normally influences note spacing, but this can be altered:
\new Voice \with { \consists "Balloon_engraver" }
{
\balloonLengthOff
\balloonGrobText #'Stem #'(3 . 4) \markup { "I'm a Stem" }
a8
\balloonGrobText #'Rest #'(-4 . -4) \markup { "I'm a rest" }
r
\balloonLengthOn
<c, g'-\balloonText #'(-2 . -2) \markup { "I'm a note head" } c>2.
}
Predefined commands
\balloonLengthOn,
\balloonLengthOff.
See also
Snippets: Editorial annotations.
Internals Reference: Balloon_engraver, BalloonTextItem, balloon-interface.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Balloon help ] | [ Up : Outside the staff ] | [ Analysis brackets > ] | ||
Grid lines
Vertical lines can be drawn between staves synchronized with the notes.
The Grid_point_engraver must be used to create the end
points of the lines, while the Grid_line_span_engraver must
be used to actually draw the lines. By default this centers grid
lines horizontally below and to the left side of each note head.
Grid lines extend from the middle lines of each staff. The
gridInterval must specify the duration between the grid
lines.
\layout {
\context {
\Staff
\consists "Grid_point_engraver"
gridInterval = #(ly:make-moment 1 4)
}
\context {
\Score
\consists "Grid_line_span_engraver"
}
}
\score {
\new ChoirStaff <<
\new Staff \relative c'' {
\stemUp
c4. d8 e8 f g4
}
\new Staff \relative c {
\clef bass
\stemDown
c4 g' f e
}
>>
}
Selected Snippets
Grid lines: changing their appearance
The appearance of grid lines can be changed by overriding some of their properties.
\score {
\new ChoirStaff <<
\new Staff {
\relative c'' {
\stemUp
c'4. d8 e8 f g4
}
}
\new Staff {
\relative c {
% this moves them up one staff space from the default position
\override Score.GridLine #'extra-offset = #'(0.0 . 1.0)
\stemDown
\clef bass
\once \override Score.GridLine #'thickness = #5.0
c4
\once \override Score.GridLine #'thickness = #1.0
g'4
\once \override Score.GridLine #'thickness = #3.0
f4
\once \override Score.GridLine #'thickness = #5.0
e4
}
}
>>
\layout {
\context {
\Staff
% set up grids
\consists "Grid_point_engraver"
% set the grid interval to one quarter note
gridInterval = #(ly:make-moment 1 4)
}
\context {
\Score
\consists "Grid_line_span_engraver"
% this moves them to the right half a staff space
\override NoteColumn #'X-offset = #-0.5
}
}
}
See also
Snippets: Editorial annotations.
Internals Reference: Grid_line_span_engraver, Grid_point_engraver, GridLine, GridPoint, grid-line-interface, grid-point-interface.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Grid lines ] | [ Up : Outside the staff ] | [ Text > ] | ||
Analysis brackets
Brackets are used in musical analysis to indicate structure in musical pieces. Simple horizontal brackets are supported.
\layout {
\context {
\Voice
\consists "Horizontal_bracket_engraver"
}
}
\relative c'' {
c2\startGroup
d\stopGroup
}
Analysis brackets may be nested.
\layout {
\context {
\Voice
\consists "Horizontal_bracket_engraver"
}
}
\relative c'' {
c4\startGroup\startGroup
d4\stopGroup
e4\startGroup
d4\stopGroup\stopGroup
}
See also
Snippets: Editorial annotations.
Internals Reference: Horizontal_bracket_engraver, HorizontalBracket, horizontal-bracket-interface, Staff.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Analysis brackets ] | [ Up : Musical notation ] | [ Writing text > ] | ||
1.8 Text
This section explains how to include text (with various formatting) in music scores.
Some text elements that are not dealt with here are discussed in other specific sections: Vocal music, Titles and headers.
| 1.8.1 Writing text | ||
| 1.8.2 Formatting text | ||
| 1.8.3 Fonts |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Text ] | [ Up : Text ] | [ Text scripts > ] | ||
1.8.1 Writing text
This section introduces different ways of adding text to a score.
|
Note: To write accented and special text (such as characters from other languages), simply insert the characters directly into the LilyPond file. The file must be saved as UTF-8. For more information, see Text encoding. |
| Text scripts | ||
| Text spanners | ||
| Text marks | ||
| Separate text |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Writing text ] | [ Up : Writing text ] | [ Text spanners > ] | ||
Text scripts
Simple “quoted text” indications may be added to a score, as demonstrated in the following example. Such indications may be manually placed above or below the staff, using the syntax described in Direction and placement.
a8^"pizz." g f e a4-"scherz." f
This syntax is actually a shorthand; more complex text
formatting may be added to a note by explicitly using a
\markup block, as described in Formatting text.
a8^\markup { \italic pizz. } g f e
a4_\markup { \tiny scherz. \bold molto } f
By default, text indications do not influence the note spacing. However, their widths can be taken into account: in the following example, the first text string does not affect spacing, whereas the second one does.
a8^"pizz." g f e \textLengthOn a4_"scherzando" f
Predefined commands
\textLengthOn,
\textLengthOff.
See also
Notation Reference: Formatting text, Direction and placement.
Snippets: Text.
Internals Reference: TextScript.
Known issues and warnings
Checking to make sure that text scripts and lyrics are within the margins is a relatively large computational task. To speed up processing, LilyPond does not perform such calculations by default; to enable it, use
\override Score.PaperColumn #'keep-inside-line = ##t
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Text scripts ] | [ Up : Writing text ] | [ Text marks > ] | ||
Text spanners
Some performance indications, e.g., rallentando or accelerando, are written as text and are extended over multiple notes with dotted lines. Such objects, called “spanners”, may be created from one note to another using the following syntax:
\override TextSpanner #'(bound-details left text) = "rit." b1\startTextSpan e,\stopTextSpan
The string to be printed is set through
object properties. By default it is printed in italic characters,
but different formatting can be obtained using
\markup blocks, as described in Formatting text.
\override TextSpanner #'(bound-details left text) =
\markup { \upright "rit." }
b1\startTextSpan c
e,\stopTextSpan
The line style, as well as the text string, can be defined as an object property. This syntax is described in Line styles.
Predefined commands
\textSpannerUp,
\textSpannerDown,
\textSpannerNeutral.
See also
Notation Reference: Line styles, Dynamics.
Snippets: Text.
Internals Reference: TextSpanner.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Text spanners ] | [ Up : Writing text ] | [ Separate text > ] | ||
Text marks
Various text elements may be added to a score using the syntax described in Rehearsal marks:
c4 \mark "Allegro" c c c
This syntax makes it possible to put any text on a bar line;
more complex text formatting may be added using a \markup
block, as described in Formatting text:
<c e>1
\mark \markup { \italic { colla parte } }
<d f>2 <e g>
<c f aes>1
This syntax also allows to print special signs, like coda, segno or fermata, by specifying the appropriate symbol name as explained in Music notation inside markup:
<bes f>2 <aes d>
\mark \markup { \musicglyph #"scripts.ufermata" }
<e g>1
Such objects are only typeset above the top staff of the score; depending on whether they are specified at the end or the middle of a bar, they can be placed above the bar line or between notes. When specified at a line break, the mark will be printed at the beginning of the next line.
\mark "Allegro" c1 c \mark "assai" \break c c
Selected Snippets
Printing marks at the end of a line or a score
Marks can be printed at the end of the current line, instead of the beginning of the following line. This is particularly useful when a mark has to be added at the end of a score – when there is no next line.
In such cases, the right end of the mark has to be aligned with the final bar line, as demonstrated on the second line of this example.
\relative c'' {
\override Score.RehearsalMark #'break-visibility = #begin-of-line-invisible
g2 c
d,2 a'
\mark \default
\break
g2 b,
c1 \bar "||"
\override Score.RehearsalMark #'self-alignment-X = #RIGHT
\mark "D.C. al Fine"
}
Aligning marks with various notation objects
If specified, text marks may be aligned with notation objects other
than bar lines. These objects include ambitus,
breathing-sign, clef, custos, staff-bar,
left-edge, key-cancellation, key-signature, and
time-signature.
In such cases, text marks will be horizontally centered above the object. However this can be changed, as demonstrated on the second line of this example (in a score with multiple staves, this setting should be done for all the staves).
\relative c' {
e1
% the RehearsalMark will be centered above the Clef
\override Score.RehearsalMark #'break-align-symbols = #'(clef)
\key a \major
\clef treble
\mark "↓"
e1
% the RehearsalMark will be centered above the TimeSignature
\override Score.RehearsalMark #'break-align-symbols = #'(time-signature)
\key a \major
\clef treble
\time 3/4
\mark "↓"
e2.
% the RehearsalMark will be centered above the KeySignature
\override Score.RehearsalMark #'break-align-symbols = #'(key-signature)
\key a \major
\clef treble
\time 4/4
\mark "↓"
e1
\break
e1
% the RehearsalMark will be aligned with the left edge of the KeySignature
\once \override Score.KeySignature #'break-align-anchor-alignment = #LEFT
\mark "↓"
\key a \major
e1
% the RehearsalMark will be aligned with the right edge of the KeySignature
\once \override Score.KeySignature #'break-align-anchor-alignment = #RIGHT
\key a \major
\mark "↓"
e1
% the RehearsalMark will be aligned with the left edge of the KeySignature
% and then shifted right by one unit.
\once \override Score.KeySignature #'break-align-anchor = #1
\key a \major
\mark "↓"
e1
}
Printing marks on every staff
Although text marks are normally only printed above the topmost staff, they may also be printed on every staff.
\score {
<<
\new Staff { c''1 \mark "molto" c'' }
\new Staff { c'1 \mark "molto" c' }
>>
\layout {
\context {
\Score
\remove "Mark_engraver"
\remove "Staff_collecting_engraver"
}
\context {
\Staff
\consists "Mark_engraver"
\consists "Staff_collecting_engraver"
}
}
}
See also
Notation Reference: Rehearsal marks, Formatting text, Music notation inside markup, The Feta font.
Snippets: Text.
Internals Reference: RehearsalMark.
Known issues and warnings
If a mark is entered at the end of the last bar of the score (where there is no next line), then the mark will not be printed at all.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Text marks ] | [ Up : Writing text ] | [ Formatting text > ] | ||
Separate text
A \markup block can exist by itself, outside of any
any \score block, as a “top-level
expression”. This syntax is described in File structure.
\markup {
Tomorrow, and tomorrow, and tomorrow...
}
This allows printing text separately from the music, which is particularly useful when the input file contains several music pieces, as described in Multiple scores in a book.
\score {
c'1
}
\markup {
Tomorrow, and tomorrow, and tomorrow...
}
\score {
c'1
}
Separate text blocks can be spread over multiple pages, making it possible to print text documents or books entirely within LilyPond. This feature, and the specific syntax it requires, are described in Multi-page markup.
Predefined commands
\markup,
\markuplines.
Selected Snippets
Stand-alone two-column markup
Stand-alone text may be arranged in several columns using
\markup commands:
\markup {
\fill-line {
\hspace #1
\column {
\line { O sacrum convivium }
\line { in quo Christus sumitur, }
\line { recolitur memoria passionis ejus, }
\line { mens impletur gratia, }
\line { futurae gloriae nobis pignus datur. }
\line { Amen. }
}
\hspace #2
\column {
\line { \italic { O sacred feast } }
\line { \italic { in which Christ is received, } }
\line { \italic { the memory of His Passion is renewed, } }
\line { \italic { the mind is filled with grace, } }
\line { \italic { and a pledge of future glory is given to us. } }
\line { \italic { Amen. } }
}
\hspace #1
}
}
See also
Notation Reference: Formatting text, File structure, Multiple scores in a book, Multi-page markup.
Snippets: Text.
Internals Reference: TextScript.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Separate text ] | [ Up : Text ] | [ Text markup introduction > ] | ||
1.8.2 Formatting text
This section presents basic and advanced text formatting,
using the \markup mode specific syntax.
| Text markup introduction | ||
| Selecting font and font size | ||
| Text alignment | ||
| Graphic notation inside markup | ||
| Music notation inside markup | ||
| Multi-page markup |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Formatting text ] | [ Up : Formatting text ] | [ Selecting font and font size > ] | ||
Text markup introduction
A \markup block is used to typeset text with an extensible
syntax called “markup mode”.
The markup syntax is similar to LilyPond’s usual syntax: a
\markup expression is enclosed in curly braces {
… }. A single word is regarded as a minimal expression,
and therefore does not need to be enclosed with braces.
Unlike simple “quoted text” indications, \markup blocks
may contain nested expressions or markup commands,
entered using the backslash \ character.
Such commands only affect the first following expression.
a1-\markup intenso
a2^\markup { poco \italic più forte }
c e1
d2_\markup { \italic "string. assai" }
e
b1^\markup { \bold { molto \italic agitato } }
c
A \markup block may also contain quoted text strings.
Such strings are treated as minimal text expressions, and
therefore any markup command or special character (such as
\ and #) will be printed verbatim without affecting
the formatting of the text. Double quotation marks themselves
may be printed by preceding them with backslashes.
a1^"\italic markup..."
a_\markup { \italic "... prints \"italic\" letters!" }
a a
To be treated as a distinct expression, a list of words needs
to be enclosed with double quotes or preceded by a command.
The way markup expressions are defined affects how these
expressions will be stacked, centered and aligned; in the
following example, the second \markup expression is
treated the same as the first one:
c1^\markup { \center-column { a bbb c } }
c1^\markup { \center-column { a { bbb c } } }
c1^\markup { \center-column { a \line { bbb c } } }
c1^\markup { \center-column { a "bbb c" } }
Markups can be stored in variables. Such variables may be directly attached to notes:
allegro = \markup { \bold \large Allegro }
{
d''8.^\allegro
d'16 d'4 r2
}
An exhaustive list of \markup-specific commands can be found in
Text markup commands.
See also
Notation Reference: Text markup commands.
Snippets: Text.
Installed files: ‘scm/markup.scm’.
Known issues and warnings
Syntax errors for markup mode can be confusing.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Text markup introduction ] | [ Up : Formatting text ] | [ Text alignment > ] | ||
Selecting font and font size
Basic font switching is supported in markup mode:
d1^\markup {
\bold { Più mosso }
\italic { non troppo \underline Vivo }
}
r2 r4 r8
d,_\markup { \italic quasi \smallCaps Tromba }
f1 d2 r
The size of the characters can also be altered in different ways:
- the font size can be set to predefined standard sizes,
- the font size can be set to an absolute value,
- the font size can also be changed relatively to its previous value.
The following example demonstrates these three methods:
f1_\markup {
\tiny espressivo
\large e
\normalsize intenso
}
a^\markup {
\fontsize #5 Sinfonia
\fontsize #2 da
\fontsize #3 camera
}
bes^\markup { (con
\larger grande
\smaller emozione
\magnify #0.6 { e sentimento } )
}
d c2 r8 c bes a g1
Text may be printed as subscript or superscript. By default these are printed in a smaller size, but a normal size can be used as well:
\markup {
\column {
\line { 1 \super st movement }
\line { 1 \normal-size-super st movement
\sub { (part two) } }
}
}
The markup mode provides an easy way to select alternate font families. The default serif font, of roman type, is automatically selected unless specified otherwise; on the last line of the following example, there is no difference between the first and the second word.
\markup {
\column {
\line { Act \number 1 }
\line { \sans { Scene I. } }
\line { \typewriter { Verona. An open place. } }
\line { Enter \roman Valentine and Proteus. }
}
}
Some of these font families, used for specific items such as numbers or dynamics, do not provide all characters, as mentioned in New dynamic marks and Manual repeat marks.
When used inside a word, some font-switching or formatting commands may produce an unwanted blank space. This can easily be solved by concatenating the text elements together:
\markup {
\column {
\line {
\concat { 1 \super st }
movement
}
\line {
\concat { \dynamic p , }
\italic { con dolce espressione }
}
}
}
An exhaustive list of font switching, and custom font usage commands can be found in Font.
Defining custom font sets is also possible, as explained in Fonts.
Predefined commands
\teeny,
\tiny,
\small,
\normalsize,
\large,
\huge,
\smaller,
\larger.
See also
Notation Reference: Font, New dynamic marks, Manual repeat marks, Fonts.
Snippets: Text.
Internals Reference: TextScript.
Installed files: ‘scm/define-markup-commands.scm’.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Selecting font and font size ] | [ Up : Formatting text ] | [ Graphic notation inside markup > ] | ||
Text alignment
This subsection discusses how to place text in markup mode. Markup objects can also be moved as a whole, using the syntax described in Moving objects.
Markup objects may be aligned in different ways. By default, a text indication is aligned on its left edge: in the following example, there is no difference between the first and the second markup.
d1-\markup { poco }
f
d-\markup { \left-align poco }
f
d-\markup { \center-align { poco } }
f
d-\markup { \right-align poco }
Horizontal alignment may be fine-tuned using a numeric value:
a1-\markup { \halign #-1 poco }
e'
a,-\markup { \halign #0 poco }
e'
a,-\markup { \halign #0.5 poco }
e'
a,-\markup { \halign #2 poco }
Some objects may have alignment procedures of their own, and therefore are not affected by these commands. It is possible to move such markup objects as a whole, as shown for instance in Text marks.
Vertical alignment is a bit more complex. As stated above, markup objects can be moved as a whole; however, it is also possible to move specific elements inside a markup block. In this case, the element to be moved needs to be preceded with an anchor point, that can be another markup element or an invisible object. The following example demonstrates these two possibilities; the last markup in this example has no anchor point, and therefore is not moved.
d2^\markup {
Acte I
\raise #2 { Scène 1 }
}
a'
g_\markup {
\null
\lower #4 \bold { Très modéré }
}
a
d,^\markup {
\raise #4 \italic { Une forêt. }
}
a'4 a g2 a
Some commands can affect both the horizontal and vertical alignment of text objects in markup mode. Any object affected by these commands must be preceded with an anchor point:
d2^\markup {
Acte I
\translate #'(-1 . 2) "Scène 1"
}
a'
g_\markup {
\null
\general-align #Y #3.2 \bold "Très modéré"
}
a
d,^\markup {
\null
\translate-scaled #'(-1 . 2) \teeny "Une forêt."
}
a'4 a g2 a
A markup object may include several lines of text. In the following example, each element or expression is placed on its own line, either left-aligned or centered:
\markup {
\column {
a
"b c"
\line { d e f }
}
\hspace #10
\center-column {
a
"b c"
\line { d e f }
}
}
Similarly, a list of elements or expressions may be spread to fill the entire horizontal line width (if there is only one element, it will be centered on the page). These expressions can, in turn, include multi-line text or any other markup expression:
\markup {
\fill-line {
\line { William S. Gilbert }
\center-column {
\huge \smallCaps "The Mikado"
or
\smallCaps "The Town of Titipu"
}
\line { Sir Arthur Sullivan }
}
}
\markup {
\fill-line { 1885 }
}
Long text indications can also be automatically wrapped accordingly to the given line width. These will be either left-aligned or justified, as shown in the following example.
\markup {
\column {
\line \smallCaps { La vida breve }
\line \bold { Acto I }
\wordwrap \italic {
(La escena representa el corral de una casa de
gitanos en el Albaicín de Granada. Al fondo una
puerta por la que se ve el negro interior de
una Fragua, iluminado por los rojos resplandores
del fuego.)
}
\hspace #0
\line \bold { Acto II }
\override #'(line-width . 50)
\justify \italic {
(Calle de Granada. Fachada de la casa de Carmela
y su hermano Manuel con grandes ventanas abiertas
a través de las que se ve el patio
donde se celebra una alegre fiesta)
}
}
}
An exhaustive list of text alignment commands can be found in Align.
See also
Learning Manual: Moving objects.
Notation Reference: Align, Text marks.
Snippets: Text.
Internals Reference: TextScript.
Installed files: ‘scm/define-markup-commands.scm’.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Text alignment ] | [ Up : Formatting text ] | [ Music notation inside markup > ] | ||
Graphic notation inside markup
Various graphic objects may be added to a score, using markup commands.
Some markup commands allow decoration of text elements with graphics, as demonstrated in the following example.
\markup \fill-line {
\center-column {
\circle Jack
\box "in the box"
\null
\line {
Erik Satie
\hspace #3
\bracket "1866 - 1925"
}
\null
\rounded-box \bold Prelude
}
}
Some commands may require an increase in the padding around the text; this is achieved with some markup commands exhaustively described in Align.
\markup \fill-line {
\center-column {
\box "Charles Ives (1874 - 1954)"
\null
\box \pad-markup #2 "THE UNANSWERED QUESTION"
\box \pad-x #8 "A Cosmic Landscape"
\null
}
}
\markup \column {
\line {
\hspace #10
\box \pad-to-box #'(-5 . 20) #'(0 . 5)
\bold "Largo to Presto"
}
\pad-around #3
"String quartet keeps very even time,
Flute quartet keeps very uneven time."
}
Other graphic elements or symbols may be printed without requiring any text. As with any markup expression, such objects can be combined.
\markup {
\combine
\draw-circle #4 #0.4 ##f
\filled-box #'(-4 . 4) #'(-0.5 . 0.5) #1
\hspace #5
\center-column {
\triangle ##t
\combine
\draw-line #'(0 . 4)
\arrow-head #Y #DOWN ##f
}
}
Advanced graphic features include the ability to include external image files converted to the Encapsulated PostScript format (eps), or to directly embed graphics into the input file, using native PostScript code. In such a case, it may be useful to explicitely specify the size of the drawing, as demonstrated below:
c1^\markup {
\combine
\epsfile #X #10 #"./context-example.eps"
\with-dimensions #'(0 . 6) #'(0 . 10)
\postscript #"
-2 3 translate
2.7 2 scale
newpath
2 -1 moveto
4 -2 4 1 1 arct
4 2 3 3 1 arct
0 4 0 3 1 arct
0 0 1 -1 1 arct
closepath
stroke"
}
c
An exhaustive list of graphics-specific commands can be found in Graphic.
See also
Notation Reference: Graphic, Editorial annotations.
Snippets: Text.
Internals Reference: TextScript.
Installed files: ‘scm/define-markup-commands.scm’, ‘scm/stencil.scm’.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Graphic notation inside markup ] | [ Up : Formatting text ] | [ Multi-page markup > ] | ||
Music notation inside markup
Various musical notation elements may be added to a score, inside a markup object.
Notes and accidentals can be entered using markup commands:
a2 a^\markup {
\note #"4" #1
=
\note-by-number #1 #1 #1.5
}
b1_\markup {
\natural \semiflat \flat
\sesquiflat \doubleflat
}
\glissando
a1_\markup {
\natural \semisharp \sharp
\sesquisharp \doublesharp
}
\glissando b
Other notation objects may also be printed in markup mode:
g1 bes
ees-\markup {
\finger 4
\tied-lyric #"~"
\finger 1
}
fis_\markup { \dynamic rf }
bes^\markup {
\beam #8 #0.1 #0.5
}
cis
d-\markup {
\markalphabet #8
\markletter #8
}
More generally, any available musical symbol may be included separately in a markup object, as demonstrated below; an exhaustive list of these symbols and their names can be found in The Feta font.
c2
c'^\markup { \musicglyph #"eight" }
c,4
c,8._\markup { \musicglyph #"clefs.G_change" }
c16
c2^\markup { \musicglyph #"timesig.neomensural94" }
Another way of printing non-text glyphs is described in Fonts explained. This is useful for printing braces of various sizes.
The markup mode also supports diagrams for specific instruments:
c1^\markup {
\fret-diagram-terse #"x;x;o;2;3;2;"
}
c^\markup {
\harp-pedal #"^-v|--ov^"
}
c
c^\markup {
\combine
\musicglyph #"accordion.accDiscant"
\combine
\raise #0.5 \musicglyph #"accordion.accDot"
\raise #1.5 \musicglyph #"accordion.accDot"
}
Such diagrams are documented in Instrument Specific Markup.
A whole score can even be nested inside a markup object.
In such a case, the nested \score block must
contain a \layout block, as demonstrated here:
c4 d^\markup {
\score {
\relative c' { c4 d e f }
\layout { }
}
}
e f |
c d e f
An exhaustive list of music notation related commands can be found in Music.
See also
Notation Reference: Music, The Feta font, Fonts explained.
Snippets: Text.
Internals Reference: TextScript.
Installed files: ‘scm/define-markup-commands.scm’, ‘scm/fret-diagrams.scm’, ‘scm/harp-pedals.scm’.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Music notation inside markup ] | [ Up : Formatting text ] | [ Fonts > ] | ||
Multi-page markup
Although standard markup objects are not breakable, a specific syntax makes it possible to enter lines of text that can spread over multiple pages:
\markuplines {
\justified-lines {
A very long text of justified lines.
...
}
\wordwrap-lines {
Another very long paragraph.
...
}
...
}
This syntax accepts a list of markups, that can be
- the result of a markup list command,
- a list of markups,
- a list of markup lists.
An exhaustive list of markup list commands can be found in Text markup list commands.
See also
Notation Reference: Text markup list commands, New markup list command definition.
Snippets: Text.
Internals Reference: TextScript.
Installed files: ‘scm/define-markup-commands.scm’.
Predefined commands
\markuplines.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Multi-page markup ] | [ Up : Text ] | [ Fonts explained > ] | ||
1.8.3 Fonts
This section presents the way fonts are handled, and how they may be changed in scores.
| Fonts explained | ||
| Single entry fonts | ||
| Entire document fonts |
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Fonts ] | [ Up : Fonts ] | [ Single entry fonts > ] | ||
Fonts explained
Fonts are handled through several libraries. FontConfig is used to detect available fonts on the system; the selected fonts are rendered using Pango.
Music notation fonts can be described as a set of
specific glyphs, ordered in several families.
The following syntax allows various LilyPond feta non-text
fonts to be used directly in markup mode:
a1^\markup {
\vcenter {
\override #'(font-encoding . fetaBraces)
\lookup #"brace120"
\override #'(font-encoding . fetaNumber)
\column { 1 3 }
\override #'(font-encoding . fetaDynamic)
sf
\override #'(font-encoding . fetaMusic)
\lookup #"noteheads.s0petrucci"
}
}
However, all these glyphs except the braces of various sizes
contained in fetaBraces are available using the
simpler syntax described in Music notation inside markup.
When using the glyphs contained in fetaBraces, the size of
the brace is specified by the numerical part of the glyph name, in
arbitrary units. Any integer from 0 to 575 inclusive
may be specified, 0 giving the smallest brace. The optimum
value must be determined by trial and error. These glyphs are all
left braces; right braces may be obtained by rotation, see
Rotating objects.
Three families of text fonts are made available: the roman (serif) font, that defaults to New Century Schoolbook, the sans font and the monospaced typewriter font – these last two families are determined by the Pango installation.
Each family may include different shapes and series.
The following example demonstrates the ability to select
alternate families, shapes, series and sizes. The value
supplied to font-size is the required change from the
default size.
\override Score.RehearsalMark #'font-family = #'typewriter \mark \markup "Ouverture" \override Voice.TextScript #'font-shape = #'italic \override Voice.TextScript #'font-series = #'bold d2.^\markup "Allegro" \override Voice.TextScript #'font-size = #-3 c4^smaller
A similar syntax may be used in markup mode, however in this case it is preferable to use the simpler syntax explained in Selecting font and font size:
\markup {
\column {
\line {
\override #'(font-shape . italic)
\override #'(font-size . 4)
Idomeneo,
}
\line {
\override #'(font-family . typewriter)
{
\override #'(font-series . bold)
re
di
}
\override #'(font-family . sans)
Creta
}
}
}
Although it is easy to switch between preconfigured fonts, it is also possible to use other fonts, as explained in the following sections: Single entry fonts and Entire document fonts.
See also
Notation Reference: The Feta font, Music notation inside markup, Selecting font and font size, Font.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Fonts explained ] | [ Up : Fonts ] | [ Entire document fonts > ] | ||
Single entry fonts
Any font that is installed on the operating system and recognized by FontConfig may be used in a score, using the following syntax:
\override Staff.TimeSignature #'font-name = #"Charter"
\override Staff.TimeSignature #'font-size = #2
\time 3/4
a1_\markup {
\override #'(font-name . "Vera Bold")
{ Vera Bold }
}
The following command displays a list of all available fonts on the operating system:
lilypond -dshow-available-fonts x
The last argument of the command can be anything, but has to be present.
See also
Notation Reference: Fonts explained, Entire document fonts.
Snippets: Text.
Installed files: ‘lily/font-config-scheme.cc’.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ Specialist notation >> ] | ||
| [ < Single entry fonts ] | [ Up : Fonts ] | [ Specialist notation > ] | ||
Entire document fonts
It is possible to change the fonts to be used as the default fonts in the roman, sans and typewriter font families by specifying them, in that order, as shown in the example below. For an explanation of fonts, see Fonts explained.
\paper {
myStaffSize = #20
#(define fonts
(make-pango-font-tree "Times New Roman"
"Nimbus Sans"
"Luxi Mono"
(/ myStaffSize 20)))
}
\relative c'{
c1-\markup {
roman,
\sans sans,
\typewriter typewriter. }
}
See also
Notation Reference: Fonts explained, Single entry fonts, Selecting font and font size, Font.
| [ << Musical notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Entire document fonts ] | [ Up : Top ] | [ Vocal music > ] | ||
2. Specialist notation
This chapter explains how to create musical notation for specific types of instrument or in specific styles.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Specialist notation ] | [ Up : Specialist notation ] | [ Common notation for vocal music > ] | ||
2.1 Vocal music
This section explains how to typeset vocal music, and make sure that the lyrics will be aligned with the notes of their melody.
| 2.1.1 Common notation for vocal music | ||
| 2.1.2 Entering lyrics | ||
| 2.1.3 Aligning lyrics to a melody | ||
| 2.1.4 Specific uses of lyrics | ||
| 2.1.5 Stanzas |
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Vocal music ] | [ Up : Vocal music ] | [ References for vocal music and lyrics > ] | ||
2.1.1 Common notation for vocal music
This section discusses issues related to vocal music in general, and to some particular styles of vocal music.
| References for vocal music and lyrics | ||
| Opera | ||
| Song books | ||
| Spoken music | ||
| Chants | ||
| Ancient vocal music |
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Common notation for vocal music ] | [ Up : Common notation for vocal music ] | [ Opera > ] | ||
References for vocal music and lyrics
Various issues may arise when engraving vocal music. Some of these are discussed in this section, while others are explained elsewhere:
- Most styles of vocal music use written text as lyrics. An introduction to this notation is to be found in Setting simple songs.
-
Vocal music is likely to require the use of
markupmode, either for lyrics of for other text elements (character’s names, etc.). This syntax is described in Text markup introduction. - Lead sheets may be printed by combining vocal parts and ‘chord mode’; this syntax is explained in Chord notation.
- ‘Ambitus’ may be added at the beginning of vocal staves, as explained in Ambitus.
- Vocal parts may be printed using traditional clefs, as shown in Clef.
- Ancient vocal music is supported, as explained in Ancient notation.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < References for vocal music and lyrics ] | [ Up : Common notation for vocal music ] | [ Song books > ] | ||
Opera
TBC
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Opera ] | [ Up : Common notation for vocal music ] | [ Spoken music > ] | ||
Song books
TBC
Selected Snippets
Simple lead sheet
When put together, chord names, a melody, and lyrics form a lead sheet:
<<
\chords { c2 g:sus4 f e }
\relative c'' {
a4 e c8 e r4
b2 c4( d)
}
\addlyrics { One day this shall be free __ }
>>
See also
Notation Reference: Chord notation.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Song books ] | [ Up : Common notation for vocal music ] | [ Chants > ] | ||
Spoken music
Such effects as ‘parlato’ or ‘Sprechgesang’ require perfomers to speak without pitch but still with rhythm; these are notated by cross note heads, as demonstrated in Special note heads.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Spoken music ] | [ Up : Common notation for vocal music ] | [ Ancient vocal music > ] | ||
Chants
TBC
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Chants ] | [ Up : Common notation for vocal music ] | [ Entering lyrics > ] | ||
Ancient vocal music
TBC
See also
Notation Reference: Ancient notation.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Ancient vocal music ] | [ Up : Vocal music ] | [ Lyrics explained > ] | ||
2.1.2 Entering lyrics
| Lyrics explained | ||
| Setting simple songs | ||
| Working with lyrics and variables |
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Entering lyrics ] | [ Up : Entering lyrics ] | [ Setting simple songs > ] | ||
Lyrics explained
Since LilyPond input files are text, there is at least one
issue to consider when working with vocal music:
song texts must be interpreted as text, not notes. For example, the
input d should be interpreted as a one letter syllable,
not the note D.
Therefore, a special lyric mode has to be used, either explicitely
or using some abbreviated methods.
Lyrics are entered in a special input mode, which can be introduced
by the keyword \lyricmode, or by using \addlyrics or
\lyricsto. In this mode you can enter lyrics,
with punctuation and accents, and the input d is not parsed as
a pitch, but rather as a one letter syllable. Syllables are entered
like notes, but with pitches replaced by text. For example,
\lyricmode { Twin-4 kle4 twin- kle litt- le star2 }
There are two main methods to specify the horizontal placement
of the syllables, either by specifying the duration of each syllable
explicitly, like in the example above, or by automatically aligning
the lyrics to a melody or other voice of music, using \addlyrics
or \lyricsto.
A word or syllable of lyrics begins with an alphabetic character, and ends with any space or digit. The following characters can be any character that is not a digit or white space.
Any character that is not a digit or white space will be regarded as
part of the syllable; one important consequence of this is that a word
can end with }, which often leads to the following mistake:
\lyricmode { lah- lah}
In this example, the } is included in the final syllable, so the
opening brace is not balanced and the input file will probably not
compile.
Similarly, a period which follows an alphabetic sequence is included in the resulting string. As a consequence, spaces must be inserted around property commands: do not write
\override Score.LyricText #'font-shape = #'italic
but instead use
\override Score . LyricText #'font-shape = #'italic
In order to assign more than one syllable to a single note, you can
surround them with quotes or use a _ character, to get spaces
between syllables, or use tilde symbol (~) to get a lyric tie.
\time 3/4
\relative c' { c2 e4 g2 e4 }
\addlyrics { gran- de_a- mi- go }
\addlyrics { pu- "ro y ho-" nes- to }
\addlyrics { pu- ro~y~ho- nes- to }
The lyric tie is implemented with the Unicode character
U+203F; therefore a font that includes this glyph
(such as DejaVuLGC) has to be used. More explanations about
text and non-text fonts can be found in Fonts.
To enter lyrics with characters from non-English languages, or with accented and special characters (such as the heart symbol or slanted quotes), simply insert the characters directly into the input file and save it with UTF-8 encoding. See Text encoding, for more info.
\relative c' { e4 f e d e f e2 }
\addlyrics { He said: “Let my peo ple go”. }
To use normal quotes in lyrics, add a backslash before the quotes. For example,
\relative c' { \time 3/4 e4 e4. e8 d4 e d c2. }
\addlyrics { "\"I" am so lone- "ly\"" said she }
The full definition of a word start in Lyrics mode is somewhat more complex.
A word in Lyrics mode begins with: an alphabetic character, _,
?, !, :, ', the control characters ^A
through ^F, ^Q through ^W, ^Y, ^^,
any 8-bit character with ASCII code over 127, or a two-character
combination of a backslash followed by one of `, ',
", or ^.
To define variables containing lyrics, the function lyricmode
must be used.
verseOne = \lyricmode { Joy to the world the Lord is come }
\score {
<<
\new Voice = "one" \relative c'' {
\autoBeamOff
\time 2/4
c4 b8. a16 g4. f8 e4 d c2
}
\addlyrics { \verseOne }
>>
}
See also
Notation Reference: Fonts.
Internals Reference: LyricText, LyricSpace.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Lyrics explained ] | [ Up : Entering lyrics ] | [ Working with lyrics and variables > ] | ||
Setting simple songs
The easiest way to add lyrics to a melody is to append
\addlyrics { the lyrics }
to a melody. Here is an example,
\time 3/4
\relative c' { c2 e4 g2. }
\addlyrics { play the game }
More stanzas can be added by adding more
\addlyrics sections
\time 3/4
\relative c' { c2 e4 g2. }
\addlyrics { play the game }
\addlyrics { speel het spel }
\addlyrics { joue le jeu }
The command \addlyrics cannot handle polyphony settings. For these
cases you should use \lyricsto and \lyricmode, as will be
introduced in Lyrics explained.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Setting simple songs ] | [ Up : Entering lyrics ] | [ Aligning lyrics to a melody > ] | ||
Working with lyrics and variables
To define variables containing lyrics, the function \lyricmode
must be used. You do not have to enter durations though, if you add
\addlyrics or \lyricsto
when invoking your variable.
verseOne = \lyricmode { Joy to the world the Lord is come }
\score {
<<
\new Voice = "one" \relative c'' {
\autoBeamOff
\time 2/4
c4 b8. a16 g4. f8 e4 d c2
}
\addlyrics { \verseOne }
>>
}
For different or more complex orderings, the best way is to setup the hierarchy of staves and lyrics first, e.g.,
\new ChoirStaff <<
\new Voice = "soprano" { music }
\new Lyrics = "sopranoLyrics" { s1 }
\new Lyrics = "tenorLyrics" { s1 }
\new Voice = "tenor" { music }
>>
and then combine the appropriate melodies and lyric lines
\context Lyrics = sopranoLyrics \lyricsto "soprano" the lyrics
The final input would resemble
<<\new ChoirStaff << setup the music >> \lyricsto "soprano" etc \lyricsto "alto" etc etc >>
See also
Internals Reference: LyricCombineMusic, Lyrics.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Working with lyrics and variables ] | [ Up : Vocal music ] | [ Automatic syllable durations > ] | ||
2.1.3 Aligning lyrics to a melody
Aligning of text with melodies can be made automatically, but if you specify the durations of the syllables it can also be made manually. Lyrics aligning and typesetting are prepared with the help of skips, hyphens and extender lines.
Lyrics are printed by interpreting them in the context called Lyrics.
\new Lyrics \lyricmode …
There are two main methods to specify the horizontal placement of the syllables:
-
by automatically aligning
the lyrics to a melody or other voice of music, using
\addlyricsor\lyricsto. -
or by specifying the duration of each syllable
explicitly, using
\lyricmode
| Automatic syllable durations | ||
| Manual syllable durations | ||
| Multiple syllables to one note | ||
| Multiple notes to one syllable | ||
| Skipping notes | ||
| Extenders and hyphens | ||
| Lyrics and repeats |
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Aligning lyrics to a melody ] | [ Up : Aligning lyrics to a melody ] | [ Manual syllable durations > ] | ||
Automatic syllable durations
The lyrics can be aligned under a given melody
automatically. This is achieved by combining the
melody and the lyrics with the \lyricsto expression
\new Lyrics \lyricsto name …
This aligns the lyrics to the
notes of the
Voice context called name, which must
already exist. Therefore normally the Voice is specified first, and
then the lyrics are specified with \lyricsto. The command
\lyricsto switches to \lyricmode mode automatically, so the
\lyricmode keyword may be omitted.
The following example uses different commands for entering lyrics.
<<
\new Voice = "one" \relative c'' {
\autoBeamOff
\time 2/4
c4 b8. a16 g4. f8 e4 d c2
}
% not recommended: left aligns syllables
\new Lyrics \lyricmode { Joy4 to8. the16 world!4. the8 Lord4 is come.2 }
% wrong: durations needed
\new Lyrics \lyricmode { Joy to the earth! the Sa -- viour reigns. }
%correct
\new Lyrics \lyricsto "one" { No more let sins and sor -- rows grow. }
>>
The second stanza is not properly aligned because the durations
were not specified. A solution for that would be to use \lyricsto.
The \addlyrics command is actually just a convenient way
to write a more complicated LilyPond structure that sets up the
lyrics.
{ MUSIC }
\addlyrics { LYRICS }
is the same as
\new Voice = "blah" { music }
\new Lyrics \lyricsto "blah" { LYRICS }
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Automatic syllable durations ] | [ Up : Aligning lyrics to a melody ] | [ Multiple syllables to one note > ] | ||
Manual syllable durations
Lyrics can also be entered without \addlyrics or
\lyricsto. In this case,
syllables are entered like notes – but with pitches replaced by text – and the
duration of each syllable must be entered explicitly. For example:
play2 the4 game2. sink2 or4 swim2.
The alignment to a melody can be specified with the
associatedVoice property,
\set associatedVoice = #"lala"
The value of the property (here: "lala") should be the name of
a
Voice context. Without this setting, extender lines
will not be formatted properly.
Here is an example demonstrating manual lyric durations,
<< \new Voice = "melody" {
\time 3/4
c2 e4 g2.
}
\new Lyrics \lyricmode {
\set associatedVoice = #"melody"
play2 the4 game2.
} >>
See also
Internals Reference: Lyrics.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Manual syllable durations ] | [ Up : Aligning lyrics to a melody ] | [ Multiple notes to one syllable > ] | ||
Multiple syllables to one note
In order to assign more than one syllable to a single note, you can
surround them with quotes or use a _ character, to get spaces
between syllables, or use tilde symbol (~) to get a lyric
tie1.
\time 3/4
\relative c' { c2 e4 g2 e4 }
\addlyrics { gran- de_a- mi- go }
\addlyrics { pu- "ro y ho-" nes- to }
\addlyrics { pu- ro~y~ho- nes- to }
See also
Internals Reference: LyricCombineMusic.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Multiple syllables to one note ] | [ Up : Aligning lyrics to a melody ] | [ Skipping notes > ] | ||
Multiple notes to one syllable
Sometimes, particularly in Medieval music, several notes are to be sung on one single syllable; such vocalises are called melismas, or melismata.
You can define melismata entirely in the lyrics, by entering _
for every extra note that has to be added to the melisma.
Additionaly, you can make an extender line to be typeset to indicate the melisma in the score, writing a double underscore next to the first syllable of the melisma. This example shows the three elements that are used for this purpose (all of them surrounded by spaces): double hyphens to separate syllables in a word, underscores to add notes to a melisma, and a double underscore to put an extender line.
{ \set melismaBusyProperties = #'()
c d( e) f f( e) e e }
\addlyrics
{ Ky -- _ _ ri __ _ _ _ e }
In this case, you can also have ties and slurs in the melody if you
set melismaBusyProperties, as is done in the example above.
However, the \lyricsto command can also
detect melismata automatically: it only puts one
syllable under a tied or slurred group of notes. If you want to force
an unslurred group of notes to be a melisma, insert \melisma
after the first note of the group, and \melismaEnd after the
last one, e.g.,
<<
\new Voice = "lala" {
\time 3/4
f4 g8
\melisma
f e f
\melismaEnd
e2
}
\new Lyrics \lyricsto "lala" {
la di __ daah
}
>>
In addition, notes are considered a melisma if they are manually beamed, and automatic beaming (see Setting automatic beam behavior) is switched off.
A complete example of a SATB score setup is in section Vocal ensembles.
Predefined commands
See also
Known issues and warnings
Melismata are not detected automatically, and extender lines must be inserted by hand.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Multiple notes to one syllable ] | [ Up : Aligning lyrics to a melody ] | [ Extenders and hyphens > ] | ||
Skipping notes
Making a lyric line run slower than the melody can be achieved by
inserting \skips into the lyrics. For every \skip,
the text will be delayed another note. The \skip command
must be followed by a valid duration, but this is ignored when
\skip is used in lyrics.
For example,
\relative c' { c c g' }
\addlyrics {
twin -- \skip 4
kle
}
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Skipping notes ] | [ Up : Aligning lyrics to a melody ] | [ Lyrics and repeats > ] | ||
Extenders and hyphens
In the last syllable of a word, melismata are sometimes indicated with a long horizontal line starting in the melisma syllable, and ending in the next one. Such a line is called an extender line, and it is entered as ‘ __ ’ (note the spaces before and after the two underscore characters).
|
Note: Melismata are indicated in the score with extender lines, which are entered as one double underscore; but short melismata can also be entered by skipping individual notes, which are entered as single underscore characters; these do not make an extender line to be typeset by default. |
Centered hyphens are entered as ‘ -- ’ between syllables of a same word (note the spaces before and after the two hyphen characters). The hyphen will be centered between the syllables, and its length will be adjusted depending on the space between the syllables.
In tightly engraved music, hyphens can be removed. Whether this
happens can be controlled with the minimum-distance (minimum
distance between two syllables) and the minimum-length
(threshold below which hyphens are removed).
See also
Internals Reference: LyricExtender, LyricHyphen
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Extenders and hyphens ] | [ Up : Aligning lyrics to a melody ] | [ Specific uses of lyrics > ] | ||
Lyrics and repeats
TBC
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Lyrics and repeats ] | [ Up : Vocal music ] | [ Divisi lyrics > ] | ||
2.1.4 Specific uses of lyrics
Often, different stanzas of one song are put to one melody in slightly
differing ways. Such variations can still be captured with
\lyricsto.
| Divisi lyrics | ||
| Lyrics independent of notes | ||
| Spacing out syllables | ||
| Centering lyrics between staves |
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Specific uses of lyrics ] | [ Up : Specific uses of lyrics ] | [ Lyrics independent of notes > ] | ||
Divisi lyrics
You can display alternate (or divisi) lyrics by naming voice contexts and attaching lyrics to those specific contexts.
\score{ <<
\new Voice = "melody" {
\relative c' {
c4
<<
{ \voiceOne c8 e }
\new Voice = "splitpart" { \voiceTwo c4 }
>>
\oneVoice c4 c | c
}
}
\new Lyrics \lyricsto "melody" { we shall not o- ver- come }
\new Lyrics \lyricsto "splitpart" { will }
>> }
You can use this trick to display different lyrics for a repeated section.
\score{ <<
\new Voice = "melody" \relative c' {
c2 e | g e | c1 |
\new Voice = "verse" \repeat volta 2 {c4 d e f | g1 | }
a2 b | c1}
\new Lyrics = "mainlyrics" \lyricsto melody \lyricmode {
do mi sol mi do
la si do }
\context Lyrics = "mainlyrics" \lyricsto verse \lyricmode {
do re mi fa sol }
\new Lyrics = "repeatlyrics" \lyricsto verse \lyricmode {
dodo rere mimi fafa solsol }
>>
}
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Divisi lyrics ] | [ Up : Specific uses of lyrics ] | [ Spacing out syllables > ] | ||
Lyrics independent of notes
In some complex vocal music, it may be desirable to place
lyrics completely independently of notes. Music defined
inside lyricrhythm disappears into the
Devnull context, but the rhythms can still be used
to place the lyrics.
voice = {
c''2
\tag #'music { c''2 }
\tag #'lyricrhythm { c''4. c''8 }
d''1
}
lyr = \lyricmode { I like my cat! }
<<
\new Staff \keepWithTag #'music \voice
\new Devnull="nowhere" \keepWithTag #'lyricrhythm \voice
\new Lyrics \lyricsto "nowhere" \lyr
\new Staff { c'8 c' c' c' c' c' c' c'
c' c' c' c' c' c' c' c' }
>>
This method is recommended only if the music in the Devnull
context does not contain melismata. Melismata are defined by the
Voice context. Connecting lyrics to a Devnull context
makes the voice/lyrics links to get lost, and so does the info on
melismata. Therefore, if you link lyrics to a Devnull context,
the implicit melismata get ignored.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Lyrics independent of notes ] | [ Up : Specific uses of lyrics ] | [ Centering lyrics between staves > ] | ||
Spacing out syllables
To increase the spacing between lyrics, set the minimum-distance property of LyricSpace.
{
c c c c
\override Lyrics.LyricSpace #'minimum-distance = #1.0
c c c c
}
\addlyrics {
longtext longtext longtext longtext
longtext longtext longtext longtext
}
To make this change for all lyrics in the score, set the property in the layout.
\score {
\relative c' {
c c c c
c c c c
}
\addlyrics {
longtext longtext longtext longtext
longtext longtext longtext longtext
}
\layout {
\context {
\Lyrics
\override LyricSpace #'minimum-distance = #1.0
}
}
}
Selected Snippets
Checking to make sure that text scripts and lyrics are within the margins is a relatively large computational task. To speed up processing, LilyPond does not perform such calculations by default; to enable it, use
\override Score.PaperColumn #'keep-inside-line = ##t
To make lyrics avoid bar lines as well, use
\layout {
\context {
\Lyrics
\consists "Bar_engraver"
\consists "Separating_line_group_engraver"
\override BarLine #'transparent = ##t
}
}
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Spacing out syllables ] | [ Up : Specific uses of lyrics ] | [ Stanzas > ] | ||
Centering lyrics between staves
TBC
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Centering lyrics between staves ] | [ Up : Vocal music ] | [ Adding stanza numbers > ] | ||
2.1.5 Stanzas
| Adding stanza numbers | ||
| Adding dynamics marks to stanzas | ||
| Adding singers’ names to stanzas | ||
| Stanzas with different rhythms | ||
| Printing stanzas at the end | ||
| Printing stanzas at the end in multiple columns |
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Stanzas ] | [ Up : Stanzas ] | [ Adding dynamics marks to stanzas > ] | ||
Adding stanza numbers
Stanza numbers can be added by setting stanza, e.g.,
\new Voice {
\time 3/4 g2 e4 a2 f4 g2.
} \addlyrics {
\set stanza = #"1. "
Hi, my name is Bert.
} \addlyrics {
\set stanza = #"2. "
Oh, ché -- ri, je t'aime
}
These numbers are put just before the start of the first syllable.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Adding stanza numbers ] | [ Up : Stanzas ] | [ Adding singers' names to stanzas > ] | ||
Adding dynamics marks to stanzas
Stanzas differing in loudness may be indicated by putting a
dynamics mark before each stanza. In LilyPond, everything coming in
front of a stanza goes into the StanzaNumber object; dynamics marks
are no different. For technical reasons, you have to set the stanza
outside \lyricmode:
text = {
\set stanza = \markup { \dynamic "ff" "1. " }
\lyricmode {
Big bang
}
}
<<
\new Voice = "tune" {
\time 3/4
g'4 c'2
}
\new Lyrics \lyricsto "tune" \text
>>
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Adding dynamics marks to stanzas ] | [ Up : Stanzas ] | [ Stanzas with different rhythms > ] | ||
Adding singers’ names to stanzas
Names of singers can also be added. They are printed at the start of
the line, just like instrument names. They are created by setting
vocalName. A short version may be entered as shortVocalName.
\new Voice {
\time 3/4 g2 e4 a2 f4 g2.
} \addlyrics {
\set vocalName = #"Bert "
Hi, my name is Bert.
} \addlyrics {
\set vocalName = #"Ernie "
Oh, ché -- ri, je t'aime
}
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Adding singers' names to stanzas ] | [ Up : Stanzas ] | [ Printing stanzas at the end > ] | ||
Stanzas with different rhythms
Ignoring melismata
One possibility is that the text has a melisma in one stanza, but
multiple syllables in another one. One solution is to make the faster
voice ignore the melisma. This is done by setting
ignoreMelismata in the Lyrics context.
<<
\relative c' \new Voice = "lahlah" {
\set Staff.autoBeaming = ##f
c4
\slurDotted
f8.[( g16])
a4
}
\new Lyrics \lyricsto "lahlah" {
more slow -- ly
}
\new Lyrics \lyricsto "lahlah" {
go
\set ignoreMelismata = ##t
fas -- ter
\unset ignoreMelismata
still
}
>>
Known issues and warnings
Unlike most \set commands, \set ignoreMelismata does
not work if prefixed with \once. It is necessary to use
\set and \unset to bracket the lyrics where melismata
are to be ignored.
Switching to an alternative melody
More complex variations in text underlay are possible. It is possible
to switch the melody for a line of lyrics during the text. This is
done by setting the associatedVoice property. In the example
the text for the first stanza is set to a melody called ‘lahlah’,
\new Lyrics \lyricsto "lahlah" {
Ju -- ras -- sic Park
}
The second stanza initially is set to the lahlah context, but
for the syllable ‘ran’, it switches to a different melody.
This is achieved with
\set associatedVoice = alternative
Here, alternative is the name of the Voice context
containing the triplet.
This command must be one syllable too early, before ‘Ty’ in this case. In other words, changing the associatedVoice happens one step later than expected. This is for technical reasons, and it is not a bug.
\new Lyrics \lyricsto "lahlah" {
\set associatedVoice = alternative % applies to "ran"
Ty --
ran --
no --
\set associatedVoice = lahlah % applies to "rus"
sau -- rus Rex
}
The underlay is switched back to the starting situation by assigning
lahlah to associatedVoice.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Stanzas with different rhythms ] | [ Up : Stanzas ] | [ Printing stanzas at the end in multiple columns > ] | ||
Printing stanzas at the end
Sometimes it is appropriate to have one stanza set
to the music, and the rest added in verse form at
the end of the piece. This can be accomplished by adding
the extra verses into a \markup section outside
of the main score block. Notice that there are two
different ways to force linebreaks when using
\markup.
melody = \relative c' {
e d c d | e e e e |
d d e d | c1 |
}
text = \lyricmode {
\set stanza = #"1." Ma- ry had a lit- tle lamb,
its fleece was white as snow.
}
\score{ <<
\new Voice = "one" { \melody }
\new Lyrics \lyricsto "one" \text
>>
\layout { }
}
\markup { \column{
\line{ Verse 2. }
\line{ All the children laughed and played }
\line{ To see a lamb at school. }
}
}
\markup{
\wordwrap-string #"
Verse 3.
Mary took it home again,
It was against the rule."
}
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Printing stanzas at the end ] | [ Up : Stanzas ] | [ Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments > ] | ||
Printing stanzas at the end in multiple columns
When a piece of music has many verses, they are often printed in multiple columns across the page. An outdented verse number often introduces each verse. The following example shows how to produce such output in LilyPond.
melody = \relative c' {
c c c c | d d d d
}
text = \lyricmode {
\set stanza = #"1." This is verse one.
It has two lines.
}
\score{ <<
\new Voice = "one" { \melody }
\new Lyrics \lyricsto "one" \text
>>
\layout { }
}
\markup {
\fill-line {
\hspace #0.1 % moves the column off the left margin;
% can be removed if space on the page is tight
\column {
\line { \bold "2."
\column {
"This is verse two."
"It has two lines."
}
}
\hspace #0.1 % adds vertical spacing between verses
\line { \bold "3."
\column {
"This is verse three."
"It has two lines."
}
}
}
\hspace #0.1 % adds horizontal spacing between columns;
% if they are still too close, add more " " pairs
% until the result looks good
\column {
\line { \bold "4."
\column {
"This is verse four."
"It has two lines."
}
}
\hspace #0.1 % adds vertical spacing between verses
\line { \bold "5."
\column {
"This is verse five."
"It has two lines."
}
}
}
\hspace #0.1 % gives some extra space on the right margin;
% can be removed if page space is tight
}
}
See also
Internals Reference: LyricText, StanzaNumber.
2.2 Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments
This section discusses several aspects of music notation that are unique to keyboard instruments and other instruments notated on many staves, such as harps and vibraphones. For the purposes of this section this entire group of multi-staff instruments is called “keyboards” for short, even though some of them do not have a keyboard.
| 2.2.1 Common notation for keyboards | ||
| 2.2.2 Piano | ||
| 2.2.3 Accordion | ||
| 2.2.4 Harp |
2.2.1 Common notation for keyboards
This section discusses notation issues that may arise for most keyboard instruments.
| References for keyboards | ||
| Changing staff manually | ||
| Changing staff automatically | ||
| Staff-change lines | ||
| Cross-staff stems |
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Common notation for keyboards ] | [ Up : Common notation for keyboards ] | [ Changing staff manually > ] | ||
References for keyboards
Keyboard instruments are usually notated with Piano staves. These
are two or more normal staves coupled with a brace. The same
notation is also used for other keyed instruments.
Organ music is normally written with two staves inside a
PianoStaff group and third, normal staff for the pedals.
The staves in keyboard music are largely independent, but sometimes voices can cross between the two staves. This section discusses notation techniques particular to keyboard music.
Several common issues in keyboard music are covered elsewhere:
- Keyboard music usually contains multiple voices and the number of voices may change regularly; this is described in Collision resolution.
- Keyboard music can be written in parallel, as described in Writing music in parallel.
- Fingerings are indicated with Fingering instructions.
- Organ pedal indications are inserted as articulations, see List of articulations.
- Vertical grid lines can be shown with Grid lines.
- Keyboard music often contains Laissez vibrer ties as well as ties on arpeggios and tremolos, described in Ties.
- Placing arpeggios across multiple voices and staves is covered in Arpeggio.
- Tremolo marks are described in Tremolo repeats.
- Several of the tweaks that can occur in keyboard music are demonstrated in Real music example.
- Hidden notes can be used to produce ties that cross voices, as shown in Other uses for tweaks.
See also
Learning Manual: Real music example, Other uses for tweaks.
Notation Reference: Grouping staves, Instrument names, Collision resolution, Writing music in parallel, Fingering instructions, List of articulations, Grid lines, Ties, Arpeggio, Tremolo repeats.
Internals Reference: PianoStaff.
Snippets: Keyboards.
Known issues and warnings
Dynamics are not automatically centered, but workarounds do exist. One
option is the ‘piano centered dynamics’ template under
Piano templates; another option is to increase the
staff-padding of dynamics as discussed in
objects
Moving objects.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < References for keyboards ] | [ Up : Common notation for keyboards ] | [ Changing staff automatically > ] | ||
Changing staff manually
Voices can be switched between staves manually, using the command
\change Staff = staffname
The string staffname is the name of the staff. It switches
the current voice from its current staff to the staff called
staffname. Typical values for staffname are
"up" and "down", or "RH" and "LH".
Cross-staff notes are beamed automatically:
\new PianoStaff <<
\new Staff = "up" {
<e' c'>8
\change Staff = "down"
g8 fis g
\change Staff = "up"
<g'' c''>8
\change Staff = "down"
e8 dis e
\change Staff = "up"
}
\new Staff = "down" {
\clef bass
% keep staff alive
s1
}
>>
If the beaming needs to be tweaked, make any changes to the stem directions first. The beam positions are then measured from the center of the staff that is closest to the beam. For a simple example of beam tweaking, see notation Fixing overlapping notation.
See also
Learning Manual: Fixing overlapping notation.
Notation Reference: Stems, Automatic beams.
Snippets: Keyboards.
Internals Reference: Beam, ContextChange.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Changing staff manually ] | [ Up : Common notation for keyboards ] | [ Staff-change lines > ] | ||
Changing staff automatically
Voices can be made to switch automatically between the top and the bottom staff. The syntax for this is
\autochange …music…
This will create two staves inside the current staff group
(usually a PianoStaff), called "up" and
"down". The lower staff will be in the bass clef by default.
The autochanger switches on the basis of the pitch (middle C is the
turning point), and it looks ahead skipping over rests to switch
in advance.
\new PianoStaff {
\autochange {
g4 a b c'
d'4 r a g
}
}
A \relative section that is outside of \autochange
has no effect on the pitches of the music, so if necessary, put
\relative inside \autochange.
If additional control is needed over the individual staves, they
can be created manually with the names "up" and
"down". The \autochange command will then switch
its voice between the existing staves.
|
Note: If staves are created manually, they must be named
|
For example, staves must be created manually in order to place a key signature in the lower staff:
\new PianoStaff <<
\new Staff = "up" {
\new Voice = "melOne" {
\key g \major
\autochange \relative c' {
g8 b a c b d c e
d8 r fis, g a2
}
}
}
\new Staff = "down" {
\key g \major
\clef bass
}
>>
See also
Notation Reference: Changing staff manually.
Snippets: Keyboards.
Internals Reference: AutoChangeMusic.
Known issues and warnings
The staff switches may not end up in optimal places. For high quality output, staff switches should be specified manually.
Chords will not be split across the staves; they will be assigned to a staff based on the first note named in the chord construct.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Changing staff automatically ] | [ Up : Common notation for keyboards ] | [ Cross-staff stems > ] | ||
Staff-change lines
Whenever a voice switches to another staff, a line connecting the notes can be printed automatically:
\new PianoStaff <<
\new Staff = "one" {
\showStaffSwitch
c1
\change Staff = "two"
b2 a
}
\new Staff = "two" {
\clef bass
s1*2
}
>>
Predefined commands
\showStaffSwitch,
\hideStaffSwitch.
See also
Snippets: Keyboards.
Internals Reference: Note_head_line_engraver, VoiceFollower.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Staff-change lines ] | [ Up : Common notation for keyboards ] | [ Piano > ] | ||
Cross-staff stems
Chords that cross staves may be produced:
\new PianoStaff <<
\new Staff {
\relative c' {
f8 e4 d8 d f e4
}
}
\new Staff {
\relative c' {
<< {
\clef bass
% stems may overlap the other staff
\override Stem #'cross-staff = ##t
% extend the stems to reach other other staff
\override Stem #'length = #12
% do not print extra flags
\override Stem #'flag-style = #'no-flag
% prevent beaming as needed
a8 g4 f8 f bes\noBeam g4
}
\\
{
f,2 bes4 c
} >>
}
}
>>
Selected Snippets
Indicating cross-staff chords with arpeggio bracket
An arpeggio bracket can indicate that notes on two different staves are
to be played with the same hand. In order to do this, the
PianoStaff must be set to accept cross-staff arpeggios and the
arpeggios must be set to the bracket shape in the PianoStaff
context.
(Debussy, Les collines d’Anacapri, m. 65)
\new PianoStaff <<
\set PianoStaff.connectArpeggios = ##t
\override PianoStaff.Arpeggio #'stencil = #ly:arpeggio::brew-chord-bracket
\new Staff {
\relative c' {
\key b \major
\time 6/8
b8-.(\arpeggio fis'-.\> cis-. e-. gis-. b-.)\!\fermata^\laissezVibrer
\bar "||"
}
}
\new Staff {
\relative c' {
\clef bass
\key b \major
<<
{
<a e cis>2.\arpeggio
}
\\
{
<a, e a,>2.
}
>>
}
}
>>
See also
Snippets: Keyboards.
Internals Reference: Stem.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Cross-staff stems ] | [ Up : Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments ] | [ Piano pedals > ] | ||
2.2.2 Piano
This section discusses notation issues that relate most directly to the piano.
| Piano pedals |
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Piano ] | [ Up : Piano ] | [ Accordion > ] | ||
Piano pedals
Pianos generally have three pedals that alter the way sound is produced: sustain, sostenuto (sos.), and una corda (U.C.). Sustain pedals are also found on vibraphones and celestas.
c4\sustainOn d e g <c, f a>1\sustainOff c4\sostenutoOn e g c, <bes d f>1\sostenutoOff c4\unaCorda d e g <d fis a>1\treCorde
There are three styles of pedal indications: text, bracket, and mixed. The sustain pedal and the una corda pedal use the text style by default while the sostenuto pedal uses mixed by default.
c4\sustainOn g c2\sustainOff \set Staff.pedalSustainStyle = #'mixed c4\sustainOn g c d d\sustainOff\sustainOn g, c2\sustainOff \set Staff.pedalSustainStyle = #'bracket c4\sustainOn g c d d\sustainOff\sustainOn g, c2 \bar "|."
The placement of the pedal commands matches the physical movement of the sustain pedal during piano performance. Pedalling to the final bar line is indicated by omitting the final pedal up command.
See also
Notation Reference: Ties.
Snippets: Keyboards.
Internals Reference: SustainPedal, SustainPedalLineSpanner, SustainEvent, SostenutoPedal, SostenutoPedalLineSpanner, SostenutoEvent, UnaCordaPedal, UnaCordaPedalLineSpanner, UnaCordaEvent, PianoPedalBracket, Piano_pedal_engraver.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Piano pedals ] | [ Up : Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments ] | [ Discant symbols > ] | ||
2.2.3 Accordion
This section discusses notation that is unique to the accordion.
| Discant symbols |
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Accordion ] | [ Up : Accordion ] | [ Harp > ] | ||
Discant symbols
Accordions are often built with more than one set of reeds that may be in unison with, an octave above, or an octave below the written pitch. Each accordion maker has different names for the shifts that select the various reed combinations, such as oboe, musette, or bandonium, so a system of symbols has come into use to simplify the performance instructions.
Selected Snippets
Accordion-discant symbols
Accordion discant-specific symbols are added using \markup. The
vertical placement of the symbols can be tweaked by changing the
\raise arguments.
discant = \markup {
\musicglyph #"accordion.accDiscant"
}
dot = \markup {
\musicglyph #"accordion.accDot"
}
\layout { ragged-right = ##t }
% 16 voets register
accBasson = ^\markup {
\combine
\discant
\raise #0.5 \dot
}
% een korig 8 en 16 voets register
accBandon = ^\markup {
\combine
\discant
\combine
\raise #0.5 \dot
\raise #1.5 \dot
}
accVCello = ^\markup {
\combine
\discant
\combine
\raise #0.5 \dot
\combine
\raise #1.5 \dot
\translate #'(1 . 0) \raise #1.5 \dot
}
% 4-8-16 voets register
accHarmon = ^\markup {
\combine
\discant
\combine
\raise #0.5 \dot
\combine
\raise #1.5 \dot
\raise #2.5 \dot
}
accTrombon = ^\markup {
\combine
\discant
\combine
\raise #0.5 \dot
\combine
\raise #1.5 \dot
\combine
\translate #'(1 . 0) \raise #1.5 \dot
\translate #'(-1 . 0) \raise #1.5 \dot
}
% eenkorig 4 en 16 voets register
accOrgan = ^\markup {
\combine
\discant
\combine
\raise #0.5 \dot
\raise #2.5 \dot
}
accMaster = ^\markup {
\combine
\discant
\combine
\raise #0.5 \dot
\combine
\raise #1.5 \dot
\combine
\translate #'(1 . 0) \raise #1.5 \dot
\combine
\translate #'(-1 . 0) \raise #1.5 \dot
\raise #2.5 \dot
}
accAccord = ^\markup {
\combine
\discant
\combine
\raise #1.5 \dot
\combine
\translate #'(1 . 0) \raise #1.5 \dot
\combine
\translate #'(-1 . 0) \raise #1.5 \dot
\raise #2.5 \dot
}
accMusette = ^\markup {
\combine
\discant
\combine
\raise #1.5 \dot
\combine
\translate #'(1 . 0) \raise #1.5 \dot
\translate #'(-1 . 0) \raise #1.5 \dot
}
accCeleste = ^\markup {
\combine
\discant
\combine
\raise #1.5 \dot
\translate #'(-1 . 0) \raise #1.5 \dot
}
accOboe = ^\markup {
\combine
\discant
\combine
\raise #1.5 \dot
\raise #2.5 \dot
}
accClarin = ^\markup {
\combine
\discant
\raise #1.5 \dot
}
accPiccolo = ^\markup {
\combine
\discant
\raise #2.5 \dot
}
accViolin = ^\markup {
\combine
\discant
\combine
\raise #1.5 \dot
\combine
\translate #'(1 . 0) \raise #1.5 \dot
\raise #2.5 \dot
}
\relative c'' {
c4 d\accBasson e f
c4 d\accBandon e f
c4 d\accVCello e f
c4 d\accHarmon e f
c4 d\accTrombon e f
\break
c4 d\accOrgan e f
c4 d\accMaster e f
c4 d\accAccord e f
c4 d\accMusette e f
c4 d\accCeleste e f
\break
c4 d\accOboe e f
c4 d\accClarin e f
c4 d\accPiccolo e f
c4 d\accViolin e f
}
See also
Snippets: Keyboards.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Discant symbols ] | [ Up : Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments ] | [ References for harps > ] | ||
2.2.4 Harp
This section discusses notation issues that are unique to the harp.
| References for harps | ||
| Harp pedals |
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Harp ] | [ Up : Harp ] | [ Harp pedals > ] | ||
References for harps
Some common characteristics of harp music are covered elsewhere:
- The glissando is the most characterisic harp technique, Glissando.
- A bisbigliando is written as a tremelo Tremolo repeats
- Natural harmonics are covered under Harmonics.
- For directional arpeggios and non-arpeggios, see Arpeggio.
See also
Notation Reference: Tremolo repeats Glissando Arpeggio Harmonics
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < References for harps ] | [ Up : Harp ] | [ Unfretted string instruments > ] | ||
Harp pedals
Harps have seven strings per octave that may be sounded at the natural, flattened, or sharpened pitch. In lever harps, each string is adjusted individually, but in pedal harps every string with the same pitch name is controlled by a single pedal. From the player’s left to right, the pedals are D, C, and B on the left and E, F, G, and A on the right. The position of the pedals may be indicated with text marks:
\textLengthOn
cis1_\markup \concat \vcenter { [D \flat C \sharp B|E \sharp F \sharp G A \flat] }
c!1_\markup \concat \vcenter {[ C \natural ]}
or pedal diagrams:
\textLengthOn
cis1_\markup { \harp-pedal #"^v-|vv-^" }
c!1_\markup { \harp-pedal #"^o--|vv-^" }
The \harp-pedal command accepts a string of characters, where
^ is the highest pedal position (flattened pitch), - is
the middle pedal postion (natural pitch), v is the lowest pedal
position (sharpened pitch), and | is the divider. A prefixed
o will circle the following pedal symbol.
See also
Notation Reference: Text scripts Instrument Specific Markup
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Harp pedals ] | [ Up : Specialist notation ] | [ Common notation for unfretted strings > ] | ||
2.3 Unfretted string instruments
This section provides information and references which are helpful when writing for unfretted string instruments, principally orchestral strings.
| 2.3.1 Common notation for unfretted strings |
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Unfretted string instruments ] | [ Up : Unfretted string instruments ] | [ References for unfretted strings > ] | ||
2.3.1 Common notation for unfretted strings
There is little specialist notation for unfretted string instruments. The music is notated on a single staff, and usually only a single voice is required. Two voices might be required for some double-stopped or divisi passages.
| References for unfretted strings | ||
| Bowing indications | ||
| Harmonics | ||
| Snap (Bartók) pizzicato |
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Common notation for unfretted strings ] | [ Up : Common notation for unfretted strings ] | [ Bowing indications > ] | ||
References for unfretted strings
Most of the notation which is useful for orchestral strings and other bowed instruments is covered elsewhere:
- Textual indications such as “pizz.” and “arco” are added as simple text – see Text scripts.
- Fingerings, including the thumb indication, are described in Fingering instructions.
- Double stopping is normally indicated by writing a chord, see Chorded notes. Directives for playing chords may be added, see Arpeggio.
- A template for a string quartet can be found in String quartet. Others are shown in the snippets.
See also
Learning Manual: String quartet.
Notation Reference: Text scripts, Fingering instructions, Chorded notes, Arpeggio.
Snippets: Unfretted strings.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < References for unfretted strings ] | [ Up : Common notation for unfretted strings ] | [ Harmonics > ] | ||
Bowing indications
Bowing indications are created as articulations, which are described in Articulations and ornamentations.
The bowing commands, \upbow and \downbow, are used
with slurs as follows:
c4(\downbow d) e(\upbow f)
and the following example shows three ways in which an open A string on a violin might be indicated:
a4 \open
a^\markup { \teeny "II" }
a2^\markup { \small "sul A" }
Predefined commands
\downbow,
\upbow,
\open.
See also
Notation Reference: Articulations and ornamentations, Slurs.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Bowing indications ] | [ Up : Common notation for unfretted strings ] | [ Snap (Bartok) pizzicato > ] | ||
Harmonics
Natural harmonics
Natural harmonics can be notated in several ways. A diamond-shaped note head generally means to touch the string where you would stop the note if it were not a diamond.
|
Note: Harmonics must be defined inside a chord construct even if there is only a single note. |
Dotted harmonics indicated with \harmonic do not show the
dots. The context property harmonicDots should be set if
dots are required.
<d\harmonic>4 <e\harmonic>2. \set harmonicDots = ##t <d\harmonic>4 <e\harmonic>2.
Alternatively a normal note head is shown at the pitch to be sounded together with a small circle to indicate it should be played as a harmonic:
d2^\flageolet d_\flageolet
A smaller circle may be created, see the snippet list in References for unfretted strings.
Artificial harmonics
Artificial harmonics are notated with two notes, one with a normal note head indicating the stopped position and one with an open diamond note head to indicate the harmonic position.
<e a\harmonic>2 <c g'\harmonic>
See also
Music Glossary: harmonics.
Notation Reference: Special note heads, References for unfretted strings.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Harmonics ] | [ Up : Common notation for unfretted strings ] | [ Fretted string instruments > ] | ||
Snap (Bartók) pizzicato
Selected Snippets
Snap-pizzicato markup ("Bartok pizzicato")
A snap-pizzicato (also known as "Bartok pizzicato") is a "strong pizzicato where the string is plucked vertically by snapping and rebounds off the fingerboard of the instrument" (Wikipedia). It is denoted by a cicle with a vertical line going from the center upwards outside the circle. While Lilypond does not have a pre-defined command to created this markup, it is easy to create a definition and place it directly into the lilypond file.
#(define-markup-command (snappizz layout props) ()
(interpret-markup layout props
(markup #:stencil
(ly:stencil-translate-axis
(ly:stencil-add
(make-circle-stencil 0.7 0.1 #f)
(ly:make-stencil
(list 'draw-line 0.1 0 0.1 0 1)
'(-0.1 . 0.1) '(0.1 . 1)))
0.7 X))))
snapPizzicato = \markup \snappizz
% now it can be used as \snappizzicato after the note/chord
% Note that a direction (-, ^ or _) is required.
\relative c' {
c4^\snapPizzicato
% This does NOT work:
%<c e g>\snapPizzicato
<c' e g>-\snapPizzicato
<c' e g>^\snapPizzicato
<c, e g>_\snapPizzicato
}
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Snap (Bartok) pizzicato ] | [ Up : Specialist notation ] | [ Common notation for fretted strings > ] | ||
2.4 Fretted string instruments
This section discusses several aspects of music notation that are unique to fretted string instruments.
| 2.4.1 Common notation for fretted strings | ||
| 2.4.2 Guitar | ||
| 2.4.3 Banjo |
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Fretted string instruments ] | [ Up : Fretted string instruments ] | [ References for fretted strings > ] | ||
2.4.1 Common notation for fretted strings
This section discusses common notation that is unique to fretted string instruments.
| References for fretted strings | ||
| String number indications | ||
| Default tablatures | ||
| Custom tablatures | ||
| Fret diagram markups | ||
| Predefined fret diagrams | ||
| Automatic fret diagrams | ||
| Right-hand fingerings |
References for fretted strings
Music for fretted string instruments is normally notated on
a single staff, either in traditional music notation or in
tablature. Sometimes the two types are combined, and it is
especially common in popular music to use chord diagrams above
a staff of traditional notation. The guitar and the banjo are
transposing instruments, sounding an octave lower than written.
Scores for these instruments should use the "treble_8" clef.
Some other elements pertinent to fretted string instruments
are covered elsewhere:
- Fingerings are indicated as shown in Fingering instructions.
- Instructions for Laissez vibrer ties as well as ties on arpeggios and tremolos can be found in Ties.
- Instructions for handling multiple voices can be found in Collision resolution.
- Instructions for indicating harmonics can be found in Harmonics.
See also
Notation Reference: Fingering instructions, Ties, Collision resolution, Instrument names, Writing music in parallel, Arpeggio, List of articulations, Clef.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < References for fretted strings ] | [ Up : Common notation for fretted strings ] | [ Default tablatures > ] | ||
String number indications
The string on which a note should be played may be indicated by
appending \number to a note inside a chord construct
<>.
|
Note: String numbers must be defined inside a chord construct even if there is only a single note. |
\clef "treble_8" <c\5>4 <e\4> <g\3>2 <c,\5 e\4 g\3>1
When fingerings and string indications are used together, their placement is controlled by the order in which the two items appear in the code:
\clef "treble_8" <g\3-0>2 <g-0\3>
Selected Snippets
Controlling the placement of chord fingerings
The placement of fingering numbers can be controlled precisely.
\relative c' {
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(left)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>4
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(down)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>4
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(down right up)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>4
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(up)
<c-1 e-3 a-5>4
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(left)
<c-1>2
\set fingeringOrientations = #'(down)
<e-3>2
}
Allowing fingerings to be printed inside the staff
By default, vertically oriented fingerings are positioned outside the staff. However, this behavior can be canceled.
\relative c' {
<c-1 e-2 g-3 b-5>2
\once \override Fingering #'staff-padding = #'()
<c-1 e-2 g-3 b-5>2
}
See also
Notation Reference: Fingering instructions.
Snippets: Fretted strings.
Internals Reference: StringNumber, Fingering.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < String number indications ] | [ Up : Common notation for fretted strings ] | [ Custom tablatures > ] | ||
Default tablatures
Tablature notation is used for notating music for plucked string instruments. Pitches are not denoted with note heads, but by numbers indicating on which string and fret a note must be played. LilyPond offers limited support for tablature.
The string number associated with a note is given as a backslash
followed by a number. By default, string 1 is the highest,
and the tuning defaults to the standard guitar tuning (with 6 strings).
The notes are printed as tablature, by using TabStaff and
TabVoice contexts
\new TabStaff {
a,4\5 c'\2 a\3 e'\1
e\4 c'\2 a\3 e'\1
}
When no string is specified for a note, the note is assigned to
the highest string that can generate the note with a fret number
greater than or equal to the value of minimumFret.
The default value for minimumFret is 0.
\new StaffGroup <<
\new Staff \relative c {
\clef "treble_8"
c16 d e f g4
c,16 d e f g4
}
\new TabStaff \relative c {
c16 d e f g4
\set TabStaff.minimumFret = #5
c,16 d e f g4
}
>>
Harmonic indications and slides can be added to tablature notation.
\new TabStaff {
\new TabVoice {
<c g'\harmonic> d\2\glissando e\2
}
}
Selected Snippets
Stem and beam behavior in tablature
The direction of stems is controlled the same way in tablature as in traditional notation. Beams can be made horizontal, as shown in this example.
\new TabStaff {
\relative c {
g16 b d g b d g b
\stemDown
\override Beam #'damping = #+inf.0
g,,16 b d g b d g b
}
}
Polyphony in tablature
Polyphony is created the same way in a TabStaff as in a regular
staff.
upper = \relative c' {
\time 12/8
\key e \minor
\voiceOne
r4. r8 e, fis g16 b g e e' b c b a g fis e
}
lower = \relative c {
\key e \minor
\voiceTwo
r16 e d c b a g4 fis8 e fis g a b c
}
\score {
<<
\new StaffGroup = "tab with traditional" <<
\new Staff = "guitar traditional" <<
\clef "treble_8"
\context Voice = "upper" \upper
\context Voice = "lower" \lower
>>
\new TabStaff = "guitar tab" <<
\context TabVoice = "upper" \upper
\context TabVoice = "lower" \lower
>>
>>
>>
}
See also
Notation Reference: Stems.
Snippets: Fretted strings.
Internals Reference: TabNoteHead, TabStaff, TabVoice, Beam.
Known issues and warnings
Chords are not handled in a special way, and hence the automatic string selector may easily select the same string for two notes in a chord.
In order to handle \partcombine, a TabStaff must use
specially-created voices:
melodia = \partcombine { e4 g g g }{ e4 e e e }
<<
\new TabStaff <<
\new TabVoice = "one" s1
\new TabVoice = "two" s1
\new TabVoice = "shared" s1
\new TabVoice = "solo" s1
{ \melodia }
>>
>>
Guitar special effects are limited to harmonics and slides.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Default tablatures ] | [ Up : Common notation for fretted strings ] | [ Fret diagram markups > ] | ||
Custom tablatures
LilyPond tabulature automatically calculates the fret for
a note based on the string to which the note is assigned.
In order to do this, the tuning of the strings must be
specified. The tuning of the strings is given in the
StringTunings property.
LilyPond comes with predefined string tunings for banjo, mandolin, guitar and bass guitar. Lilypond automatically sets the correct transposition for predefined tunings. The following example is for bass guitar, which sounds an octave lower than written.
<<
\new Staff {
\clef "bass_8"
\relative c, {
c4 d e f
}
}
\new TabStaff {
\set TabStaff.stringTunings = #bass-tuning
\relative c, {
c4 d e f
}
}
>>
The default string tuning is guitar-tuning, which
is the standard EADGBE tuning. Some other predefined tunings are
guitar-open-g-tuning, mandolin-tuning and
banjo-open-g-tuning. The predefined string tunings
are found in scm/output-lib.scm.
A string tuning is a Scheme list of string pitches, one for each string, ordered by string number from 1 to N, where string 1 is at the top of the tablature staff and string N is at the bottom. This ordinarily results in ordering from highest pitch to lowest pitch, but some instruments (e.g. ukulele) do not have strings ordered by pitch.
A string pitch in a string tuning list is the pitch difference of the open string from middle C measured in semitones. The string pitch must be an integer. Lilypond calculates the actual pitch of the string by adding the string tuning pitch to the actual pitch for middle C.
LilyPond automatically calculates the number of strings in the
TabStaff as the number of elements in stringTunings.
Any desired string tuning can be created. For example, we can
define a string tuning for a four-string instrument with pitches
of a'', d'', g', and c':
mynotes = {
c'4 e' g' c'' |
e'' g'' b'' c'''
}
<<
\new Staff {
\clef treble
\mynotes
}
\new TabStaff {
\set TabStaff.stringTunings = #'(21 14 7 0)
\mynotes
}
>>
See also
Installed Files: ‘scm/output-lib.scm’.
Snippets: Fretted strings.
Internals Reference: Tab_note_heads_engraver.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Custom tablatures ] | [ Up : Common notation for fretted strings ] | [ Predefined fret diagrams > ] | ||
Fret diagram markups
Fret diagrams can be added to music as a markup to the desired note. The markup contains information about the desired fret diagram. There are three different fret-diagram markup interfaces: standard, terse, and verbose. The three interfaces produce equivalent markups, but have varying amounts of information in the markup string. Details about the markup interfaces are found at Text markup commands.
The standard fret diagram markup string indicates the string number and the fret number for each dot to be placed on the string. In addition, open and unplayed (muted) strings can be indicated.
<<
\context ChordNames {
\chordmode {
c1 d:m
}
}
\context Staff {
\clef "treble_8"
< c e g c' e' > 1 ^\markup
\fret-diagram #"6-x;5-3;4-2;3-o;2-1;1-o;"
< d a d' f'> ^\markup
\fret-diagram #"6-x;5-x;4-o;3-2;2-3;1-1;"
}
>>
Barre indications can be added to the diagram from the fret-diagram markup string.
<<
\context ChordNames {
\chordmode {
f1 g
}
}
\context Staff {
\clef "treble_8"
< f, c f a c' f'>1 ^\markup
\fret-diagram #"c:6-1-1;6-1;5-3;4-3;3-2;2-1;1-1;"
< g, d g b d' g'> ^\markup
\fret-diagram #"c:6-1-3;6-3;5-5;4-5;3-4;2-3;1-3;"
}
>>
The size of the fret diagram, and the number of frets in the diagram can be changed in the fret-diagram markup string.
<<
\context ChordNames {
\chordmode {
f1 g
}
}
\context Staff {
\clef "treble_8"
< f, c f a c' f'>1 ^\markup
\fret-diagram #"s:1.5;c:6-1-1;6-1;5-3;4-3;3-2;2-1;1-1;"
< g, b, d g b g'> ^\markup
\fret-diagram #"h:6;6-3;5-2;4-o;3-o;2-o;1-3;"
}
>>
The number of strings in a fret diagram can be changed to accomodate different instruments such as banjos and ukeleles with the fret-diagram markup string.
<<
\context ChordNames {
\chordmode {
a1
}
}
\context Staff {
%% A chord for ukelele
a'1 ^\markup \fret-diagram #"w:4;4-2-2;3-1-1;2-o;1-o;"
}
>>
Fingering indications can be added, and the location of fingering labels can be controlled by the fret-diagram markup string.
<<
\context ChordNames {
\chordmode {
c1 d:m
}
}
\context Staff {
\clef "treble_8"
< c e g c' e' > 1 ^\markup
\fret-diagram #"f:1;6-x;5-3-3;4-2-2;3-o;2-1-1;1-o;"
< d a d' f'> ^\markup
\fret-diagram #"f:2;6-x;5-x;4-o;3-2-2;2-3-3;1-1-1;"
}
>>
Dot radius and dot position can be controlled with the fret-diagram markup string.
<<
\context ChordNames {
\chordmode {
c1 d:m
}
}
\context Staff {
\clef "treble_8"
< c e g c' e' > 1 ^\markup
\fret-diagram #"d:0.35;6-x;5-3;4-2;3-o;2-1;1-o;"
< d a d' f'> ^\markup
\fret-diagram #"p:0.2;6-x;5-x;4-o;3-2;2-3;1-1;"
}
>>
The fret-diagram-terse markup string omits string numbers; the string number is implied by the presence of semicolons. There is one semicolon for each string in the diagram. The first semicolon corresponds to the highest string number and the last semicolon corresponds to the first string. Mute strings, open strings, and fret numbers can be indicated.
<<
\context ChordNames {
\chordmode {
c1 d:m
}
}
\context Staff {
\clef "treble_8"
< c e g c' e' > 1 ^\markup
\fret-diagram-terse #"x;3;2;o;1;o;"
< d a d' f'> ^\markup
\fret-diagram-terse #"x;x;o;2;3;1;"
}
>>
Barre indicators can be included in the fret-diagram-terse markup string.
<<
\context ChordNames {
\chordmode {
f1 g
}
}
\context Staff {
\clef "treble_8"
< f, c f a c' f'>1 ^\markup
\fret-diagram-terse #"1-(;3;3;2;1;1-);"
< g, d g b d' g'> ^\markup
\fret-diagram-terse #"3-(;5;5;4;3;3-);"
}
>>
Fingering indications can be included in the fret-diagram-terse markup string.
<<
\context ChordNames {
\chordmode {
c1 d:m
}
}
\context Staff {
\override Voice.TextScript
#'(fret-diagram-details finger-code) = #'below-string
\clef "treble_8"
< c e g c' e' > 1 ^\markup
\fret-diagram-terse #"x;3-3;2-2;o;1-1;o;"
< d a d' f'> ^\markup
\fret-diagram-terse #"x;x;o;2-2;3-3;1-1;"
}
>>
Other fret diagram properties must be adjusted using \override when using
the fret-diagram-terse markup.
The fret-diagram-verbose markup string is in the format of a Scheme list. Each element of the list indicates an item to be placed on the fret diagram.
<< \context ChordNames {
\chordmode {
c1 d:m
}
}
\context Staff {
\clef "treble_8"
< c e g c' e' > 1 ^\markup
\fret-diagram-verbose #'(
(mute 6)
(place-fret 5 3)
(place-fret 4 2)
(open 3)
(place-fret 2 1)
(open 1)
)
< d a d' f'> ^\markup
\fret-diagram-verbose #'(
(mute 6)
(mute 5)
(open 4)
(place-fret 3 2)
(place-fret 2 3)
(place-fret 1 1)
)
}
>>
Fingering indications and barres can be included in a fret-diagram-verbose markup string. Unique to the fret-diagram-verbose interface is a capo indication that can be placed on the fret diagram. The capo indication is a thick bar that covers all strings. The fret with the capo will be the lowest fret in the fret diagram.
<<
\context ChordNames {
\chordmode {
f1 g c
}
}
\context Staff {
\clef "treble_8"
\override Voice.TextScript
#'(fret-diagram-details finger-code) = #'below-string
< f, c f a c' f'>1 ^\markup
\fret-diagram-verbose #'(
(place-fret 6 1)
(place-fret 5 3)
(place-fret 4 3)
(place-fret 3 2)
(place-fret 2 1)
(place-fret 1 1)
(barre 6 1 1)
)
< g, b, d g b g'> ^\markup
\fret-diagram-verbose #'(
(place-fret 6 3 2)
(place-fret 5 2 1)
(open 4)
(open 3)
(open 2)
(place-fret 1 3 3)
)
< c e g c' e'> ^\markup
\fret-diagram-verbose #'(
(capo 3)
(mute 6)
(place-fret 4 5 1)
(place-fret 3 5 2)
(place-fret 2 5 3)
)
}
>>
All other fret diagram properties must be adjusted using \override
when using the fret-diagram-verbose markup.
The graphical layout of a fret diagram can be customized according to
user preference through the properties of the fret-diagram-interface.
Details are found at
fret-diagram-interface. For a fret diagram
markup, the interface properties belong to Voice.TextScript.
Selected Snippets
Customizing markup fret diagrams
Fret diagram properties can be set through
'fret-diagram-details. For markup fret diagrams, overrides can
be applied to the Voice.TextScript object or directly to the
markup.
<<
\chords { c1 | c | c | d }
\new Voice = "mel" {
\textLengthOn
% Set global properties of fret diagram
\override TextScript #'size = #'1.2
\override TextScript
#'(fret-diagram-details finger-code) = #'in-dot
\override TextScript
#'(fret-diagram-details dot-color) = #'white
%% C major for guitar, no barre, using defaults
% terse style
c'1^\markup { \fret-diagram-terse #"x;3-3;2-2;o;1-1;o;" }
%% C major for guitar, barred on third fret
% verbose style
% size 1.0
% roman fret label, finger labels below string, straight barre
c'1^\markup {
% standard size
\override #'(size . 1.0) {
\override #'(fret-diagram-details . (
(number-type . roman-lower)
(finger-code . in-dot)
(barre-type . straight))) {
\fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6)
(place-fret 5 3 1)
(place-fret 4 5 2)
(place-fret 3 5 3)
(place-fret 2 5 4)
(place-fret 1 3 1)
(barre 5 1 3))
}
}
}
%% C major for guitar, barred on third fret
% verbose style
% landscape orientation, arabic numbers, M for mute string
% no barre, fret label down or left, small mute label font
c'1^\markup {
\override #'(fret-diagram-details . (
(finger-code . below-string)
(number-type . arabic)
(label-dir . -1)
(mute-string . "M")
(orientation . landscape)
(barre-type . none)
(xo-font-magnification . 0.4)
(xo-padding . 0.3))) {
\fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6)
(place-fret 5 3 1)
(place-fret 4 5 2)
(place-fret 3 5 3)
(place-fret 2 5 4)
(place-fret 1 3 1)
(barre 5 1 3))
}
}
%% simple D chord
% terse style
% larger dots, centered dots, fewer frets
% label below string
d'1^\markup {
\override #'(fret-diagram-details . (
(finger-code . below-string)
(dot-radius . 0.35)
(dot-position . 0.5)
(fret-count . 3))) {
\fret-diagram-terse #"x;x;o;2-1;3-2;2-3;"
}
}
}
>>
See also
Notation Reference: Text markup commands.
Snippets: Fretted strings.
Internals Reference: fret-diagram-interface.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Fret diagram markups ] | [ Up : Common notation for fretted strings ] | [ Automatic fret diagrams > ] | ||
Predefined fret diagrams
Fret diagrams can be displayed using the FretBoards context. By
default, the FretBoards context will display fret diagrams that
are stored in a lookup table:
\include "predefined-guitar-fretboards.ly"
\context FretBoards {
\chordmode {
c1 d
}
}
The default predefined fret diagrams are contained in the file
predefined-guitar-fretboards.ly. Fret diagrams are
stored based on the pitches of a chord and the value of
stringTunings that is currently in use.
predefined-guitar-fretboards.ly contains predefined
fret diagrams only for guitar-tuning. Predefined fret
diagrams can be added for other instruments or other tunings
by following the examples found in
predefined-guitar-fretboards.ly.
Chord pitches can be entered either as simultaneous music or using chord mode (see Chord mode overview).
\include "predefined-guitar-fretboards.ly"
\context FretBoards {
\chordmode {c1}
<c' e' g'>1
}
It is common that both chord names and fret diagrams are displayed together.
This is achieved by putting a ChordNames context in parallel with
a FretBoards context and giving both contexts the same music.
\include "predefined-guitar-fretboards.ly"
mychords = \chordmode{
c1 f g
}
<<
\context ChordNames {
\mychords
}
\context FretBoards {
\mychords
}
>>
Predefined fret diagrams are transposable, as long as a diagram for the transposed chord is stored in the fret diagram table.
\include "predefined-guitar-fretboards.ly"
mychords = \chordmode{
c1 f g
}
mychordlist = {
\mychords
\transpose c e { \mychords}
}
<<
\context ChordNames {
\mychordlist
}
\context FretBoards {
\mychordlist
}
>>
The predefined fret diagram table contains seven chords (major, minor, augmented, diminished, dominant seventh, major seventh, minor seventh) for each of 17 keys. A complete list of the predefined fret diagrams is shown in Predefined fretboard diagrams. If there is no entry in the table for a chord, the FretBoards engraver will calculate a fret-diagram using the automatic fret diagram functionality described in Automatic fret diagrams.
\include "predefined-guitar-fretboards.ly"
mychords = \chordmode{
c1 c:9
}
<<
\context ChordNames {
\mychords
}
\context FretBoards {
\mychords
}
>>
Fret diagrams can be added to the fret diagram table. To add a diagram, you must specify the chord for the diagram, the tuning to be used, and a definition for the diagram. The diagram definition can be either a fret-diagram-terse definition string or a fret-diagram-verbose marking list.
\include "predefined-guitar-fretboards.ly"
\storePredefinedDiagram \chordmode {c:9}
#guitar-tuning
#"x;3-2;2-1;3-3;3-4;x;"
mychords = \chordmode{
c1 c:9
}
<<
\context ChordNames {
\mychords
}
\context FretBoards {
\mychords
}
>>
Different fret diagrams for the same chord name can be stored using different octaves of pitches. The different octave should be at least two octaves above or below the default octave, because the octaves above and below the default octave are used for transposing fretboards.
\include "predefined-guitar-fretboards.ly"
\storePredefinedDiagram \chordmode {c''}
#guitar-tuning
#(offset-fret 2 (chord-shape 'bes guitar-tuning))
mychords = \chordmode{
c1 c''
}
<<
\context ChordNames {
\mychords
}
\context FretBoards {
\mychords
}
>>
In addition to fret diagrams, LilyPond stores an internal list of chord shapes. The chord shapes are fret diagrams that can be shifted along the neck to different posistions to provide different chords. Chord shapes can be added to the internal list and then used to define predefined fret diagrams. Because they can be moved to various positions on the neck, chord shapes will normally not contain any open strings. Like fret diagrams, chord shapes can be entered as either fret-diagram-terse strings or fret-diagram-verbose marking lists.
\include "predefined-guitar-fretboards.ly"
% add a new chord shape
\addChordShape #'powerf #guitar-tuning #"1-1;3-3;3-4;x;x;x;"
% add some new chords based on the power chord shape
\storePredefinedDiagram \chordmode {f''}
#guitar-tuning
#(chord-shape 'powerf guitar-tuning)
\storePredefinedDiagram \chordmode {g''}
#guitar-tuning
#(offset-fret 2 (chord-shape 'powerf guitar-tuning))
mychords = \chordmode{
f1 f'' g g''
}
<<
\context ChordNames {
\mychords
}
\context FretBoards {
\mychords
}
>>
The graphical layout of a fret diagram can be customized according to
user preference through the properties of the fret-diagram-interface.
Details are found at
fret-diagram-interface. For a
predefined fret diagram, the interface properties belong to
FretBoards.FretBoard.
Selected Snippets
Customizing fretboard fret diagrams
Fret diagram properties can be set through
'fret-diagram-details. For FretBoard fret diagrams, overrides
are applied to the FretBoards.FretBoard object. Like
Voice, FretBoards is a bottom level context, therefore
can be omitted in property overrides.
\include "predefined-guitar-fretboards.ly"
\storePredefinedDiagram \chordmode { c' }
#guitar-tuning
#"x;1-1-(;3-2;3-3;3-4;1-1-);"
<<
\new ChordNames {
\chordmode { c1 | c | c | d }
}
\new FretBoards {
% Set global properties of fret diagram
\override FretBoards.FretBoard #'size = #'1.2
\override FretBoard
#'(fret-diagram-details finger-code) = #'in-dot
\override FretBoard
#'(fret-diagram-details dot-color) = #'white
\chordmode {
c
\once \override FretBoard #'size = #'1.0
\once \override FretBoard
#'(fret-diagram-details barre-type) = #'straight
\once \override FretBoard
#'(fret-diagram-details dot-color) = #'black
\once \override FretBoard
#'(fret-diagram-details finger-code) = #'below-string
c'
\once \override FretBoard
#'(fret-diagram-details barre-type) = #'none
\once \override FretBoard
#'(fret-diagram-details number-type) = #'arabic
\once \override FretBoard
#'(fret-diagram-details orientation) = #'landscape
\once \override FretBoard
#'(fret-diagram-details mute-string) = #"M"
\once \override FretBoard
#'(fret-diagram-details label-dir) = #LEFT
\once \override FretBoard
#'(fret-diagram-details dot-color) = #'black
c'
\once \override FretBoard
#'(fret-diagram-details finger-code) = #'below-string
\once \override FretBoard
#'(fret-diagram-details dot-radius) = #0.35
\once \override FretBoard
#'(fret-diagram-details dot-position) = #0.5
\once \override FretBoard
#'(fret-diagram-details fret-count) = #3
d
}
}
\new Voice {
c'1 | c' | c' | d'
}
>>
Defining predefined fretboards for other instruments
Predefined fret diagrams can be added for new instruments in addition to the standards used for guitar. This file shows how this is done by defining a new string-tuning and a few predefined fretboards for the Venezuelan cuatro.
This file also shows how fingerings can be included in the chords used
as reference points for the chord lookup, and displayed in the fret
diagram and the TabStaff, but not the music.
These fretboards are not transposable because they contain string information. This is planned to be corrected in the future.
% add FretBoards for the Cuatro
% Note: This section could be put into a separate file
% predefined-cuatro-fretboards.ly
% and \included into each of your compositions
cuatroTuning = #'(11 18 14 9)
dSix = { <a\4 b\1 d\3 fis\2> }
dMajor = { <a\4 d\1 d\3 fis \2> }
aMajSeven = { <a\4 cis\1 e\3 g\2> }
dMajSeven = { <a\4 c\1 d\3 fis\2> }
gMajor = { <b\4 b\1 d\3 g\2> }
\storePredefinedDiagram \dSix
#cuatroTuning
#"o;o;o;o;"
\storePredefinedDiagram \dMajor
#cuatroTuning
#"o;o;o;3-3;"
\storePredefinedDiagram \aMajSeven
#cuatroTuning
#"o;2-2;1-1;2-3;"
\storePredefinedDiagram \dMajSeven
#cuatroTuning
#"o;o;o;1-1;"
\storePredefinedDiagram \gMajor
#cuatroTuning
#"2-2;o;1-1;o;"
% end of potential include file /predefined-cuatro-fretboards.ly
#(set-global-staff-size 16)
primerosNames = \chordmode {
d:6 d a:maj7 d:maj7
g
}
primeros = {
\dSix \dMajor \aMajSeven \dMajSeven
\gMajor
}
\score {
<<
\new ChordNames {
\set chordChanges = ##t
\primerosNames
}
\new Staff {
\new Voice \with {
\remove "New_fingering_engraver"
}
\relative c'' {
\primeros
}
}
\new FretBoards {
\set stringTunings = #cuatroTuning
\override FretBoard
#'(fret-diagram-details string-count) = #'4
\override FretBoard
#'(fret-diagram-details finger-code) = #'in-dot
\primeros
}
\new TabStaff \relative c'' {
\set TabStaff.stringTunings = #cuatroTuning
\primeros
}
>>
\layout {
\context {
\Score
\override SpacingSpanner
#'base-shortest-duration = #(ly:make-moment 1 16)
}
}
\midi { }
}
See also
Notation Reference: Custom tablatures, Automatic fret diagrams, Chord mode overview, Predefined fretboard diagrams.
Installed Files: ‘ly/predefined-guitar-fretboards.ly’, ‘ly/predefined-guitar-ninth-fretboards.ly’.
Snippets: Fretted strings.
Internals Reference: fret-diagram-interface.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Predefined fret diagrams ] | [ Up : Common notation for fretted strings ] | [ Right-hand fingerings > ] | ||
Automatic fret diagrams
Fret diagrams can be automatically created from entered notes using the
FretBoards context. If no predefined diagram is available for
the entered notes in the active stringTunings, this context
calculates strings and frets that can be used to play the notes.
<<
\context ChordNames {
\chordmode {
f1 g
}
}
\context FretBoards {
< f, c f a c' f'>1
< g,\6 b, d g b g'>
}
\context Staff {
\clef "treble_8"
< f, c f a c' f'>1
< g, b, d g b' g'>
}
>>
As no predefined diagrams are loaded by default, automatic calculation of fret diagrams is the default behavior. Once default diagrams are loaded, automatic calculation can be enabled and disabled with predefined commands:
\storePredefinedDiagram <c e g c' e'>
#guitar-tuning
#"x;3-1-(;5-2;5-3;5-4;3-1-1);"
<<
\context ChordNames {
\chordmode {
c1 c c
}
}
\context FretBoards {
<c e g c' e'>1
\predefinedFretboardsOff
<c e g c' e'>
\predefinedFretboardsOn
<c e g c' e'>
}
\context Staff {
\clef "treble_8"
<c e g c' e'>1
<c e g c' e'>
<c e g c' e'>
}
>>
Sometimes the fretboard calculator will be unable to find
an accceptable diagram. This can often be remedied by
manually assigning a note to a string. In many cases, only one
note need be manually placed on a string; the rest of
the notes will then be placed appropriately by the FretBoards
context.
Fingerings can be added to FretBoard fret diagrams.
<<
\context ChordNames {
\chordmode {
c1 d:m
}
}
\context FretBoards {
< c-3 e-2 g c'-1 e' > 1
< d a-2 d'-3 f'-1>
}
\context Staff {
\clef "treble_8"
< c e g c' e' > 1
< d a d' f'>
}
>>
The minimum fret to be used in calculating strings and frets for
the FretBoard context can be set with the minimumFret
property.
<<
\context ChordNames {
\chordmode {
d1:m d:m
}
}
\context FretBoards {
< d a d' f'>
\set FretBoards.minimumFret = #5
< d a d' f'>
}
\context Staff {
\clef "treble_8"
< d a d' f'>
< d a d' f'>
}
>>
The strings and frets for the FretBoards context depend
on the stringTunings property, which has the same meaning
as in the TabStaff context. See Custom tablatures for
information on the stringTunings property.
The graphical layout of a fret diagram can be customized according to
user preference through the properties of the fret-diagram-interface.
Details are found at
fret-diagram-interface. For a
FretBoards fret diagram, the interface properties belong to
FretBoards.FretBoard.
Predefined commands
\predefinedFretboardsOff,
\predefinedFretboardsOn.
See also
Notation Reference: Custom tablatures.
Snippets: Fretted strings.
Internals Reference: fret-diagram-interface.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Automatic fret diagrams ] | [ Up : Common notation for fretted strings ] | [ Guitar > ] | ||
Right-hand fingerings
Right-hand fingerings p-i-m-a must be entered within a
chord construct <> for them to be printed in the score,
even when applied to a single note.
|
Note: There must be a hyphen after the note and a space
before the closing |
\clef "treble_8" <c-\rightHandFinger #1 >4 <e-\rightHandFinger #2 > <g-\rightHandFinger #3 > <c-\rightHandFinger #4 > <c,-\rightHandFinger #1 e-\rightHandFinger #2 g-\rightHandFinger #3 c-\rightHandFinger #4 >1
For convenience, you can abbreviate \rightHandFinger to something
short, for example RH,
#(define RH rightHandFinger)
Selected Snippets
Placement of right-hand fingerings
It is possible to exercise greater control over the placement of right-hand fingerings by setting a specific property, as demonstrated in the following example.
#(define RH rightHandFinger)
\relative c {
\clef "treble_8"
\set strokeFingerOrientations = #'(up down)
<c-\RH #1 e-\RH #2 g-\RH #3 c-\RH #4 >4
\set strokeFingerOrientations = #'(up right down)
<c-\RH #1 e-\RH #2 g-\RH #3 c-\RH #4 >4
\set strokeFingerOrientations = #'(left)
<c-\RH #1 e-\RH #2 g-\RH #3 c-\RH #4 >2
}
Fingerings, string indications, and right-hand fingerings
This example combines left-hand fingering, string indications, and right-hand fingering.
#(define RH rightHandFinger)
\relative c {
\clef "treble_8"
<c-3\5-\RH #1 >4
<e-2\4-\RH #2 >4
<g-0\3-\RH #3 >4
<c-1\2-\RH #4 >4
}
See also
Snippets: Fretted strings.
Internals Reference: StrokeFinger.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Right-hand fingerings ] | [ Up : Fretted string instruments ] | [ Indicating position and barring > ] | ||
2.4.2 Guitar
Most of the notational issues associated with guitar music are covered sufficiently in the general fretted strings section, but there are a few more worth covering here. Occasionally users want to create songbook-type documents having only lyrics with chord indications above them. Since Lilypond is a music typesetter, it is not recommended for documents that have no music notation in them. A better alternative is a word processor, text editor, or, for experienced users, a typesetter like GuitarTeX.
| Indicating position and barring | ||
| Indicating harmonics and dampened notes |
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Guitar ] | [ Up : Guitar ] | [ Indicating harmonics and dampened notes > ] | ||
Indicating position and barring
This example demonstrates how to include guitar position and barring indications.
\clef "treble_8" b16 d g b e \textSpannerDown \override TextSpanner #'(bound-details left text) = #"XII " g16\startTextSpan b16 e g e b g\stopTextSpan e16 b g d
See also
Notation Reference: Text spanners.
Snippets: Fretted strings, Expressive marks.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Indicating position and barring ] | [ Up : Guitar ] | [ Banjo > ] | ||
Indicating harmonics and dampened notes
Special note heads can be used to indicate dampened notes or harmonics. Harmonics are normally further explained with a text markup.
\relative c' {
\clef "treble_8"
\override Staff.NoteHead #'style = #'cross
g8 a b c b4
\override Staff.NoteHead #'style = #'harmonic-mixed
d^\markup { \italic { \fontsize #-2 { "harm. 12" }}} <g b>1
}
See also
Snippets: Fretted strings.
Notation Reference: Special note heads, Note head styles.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Indicating harmonics and dampened notes ] | [ Up : Fretted string instruments ] | [ Banjo tablatures > ] | ||
2.4.3 Banjo
| Banjo tablatures |
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Banjo ] | [ Up : Banjo ] | [ Percussion > ] | ||
Banjo tablatures
LilyPond has basic support for the five-string banjo. When making tablatures for five-string banjo, use the banjo tablature format function to get correct fret numbers for the fifth string:
\new TabStaff <<
\set TabStaff.tablatureFormat = #fret-number-tablature-format-banjo
\set TabStaff.stringTunings = #banjo-open-g-tuning
{
\stemDown
g8 d' g'\5 a b g e d' |
g4 d''8\5 b' a'\2 g'\5 e'\2 d' |
g4
}
>>
A number of common tunings for banjo are predefined in LilyPond:
banjo-c-tuning (gCGBD), banjo-modal-tuning (gDGCD),
banjo-open-d-tuning (aDF#AD) and banjo-open-dm-tuning
(aDFAD).
These tunings may be converted to four-string banjo tunings using the
four-string-banjo function:
\set TabStaff.stringTunings = #(four-string-banjo banjo-c-tuning)
See also
Snippets: Fretted strings.
The file ‘scm/output-lib.scm’ contains predefined banjo tunings.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Banjo tablatures ] | [ Up : Specialist notation ] | [ Common notation for percussion > ] | ||
2.5 Percussion
| 2.5.1 Common notation for percussion |
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Percussion ] | [ Up : Percussion ] | [ References for percussion > ] | ||
2.5.1 Common notation for percussion
Rhythmic music is primarily used for percussion and drum notation, but it can also be used to show the rhythms of melodies.
| References for percussion | ||
| Basic percussion notation | ||
| Drum rolls | ||
| Pitched percussion | ||
| Percussion staves | ||
| Custom percussion staves | ||
| Ghost notes |
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Common notation for percussion ] | [ Up : Common notation for percussion ] | [ Basic percussion notation > ] | ||
References for percussion
TODO add more.
- Some percussion may be notated on a rhythmic staff; this is discussed in Showing melody rhythms, and Instantiating new staves.
- MIDI output is discussed in a separate section; please see Percussion in MIDI.
See also
Notation Reference: Showing melody rhythms, Instantiating new staves. Percussion in MIDI.
Snippets: Percussion.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < References for percussion ] | [ Up : Common notation for percussion ] | [ Drum rolls > ] | ||
Basic percussion notation
Percussion notes may be entered in \drummode mode, which is
similar to the standard mode for entering notes. The simplest way
to enter percussion notes is to use the \drums command,
which creates the correct context and entry mode for percussion:
\drums {
hihat4 hh bassdrum bd
}
This is shorthand for:
\new DrumStaff {
\drummode {
hihat4 hh bassdrum bd
}
}
Each piece of percussion has a full name and an abbreviated name, and both can be used in input files. The full list of percussion note names may be found in Percussion notes.
Note that the normal notation of pitches (such as cis4) in
a DrumStaff context will cause an error message.
Percussion clefs are added automatically to a DrumStaff
contex, but other clefs may also be used.
There are a few issues concerning MIDI support for percussion instruments; for details please see Percussion in MIDI.
See also
Notation Reference: Percussion in MIDI, Percussion notes.
File: ‘ly/drumpitch-init.ly’
Snippets: Percussion.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Basic percussion notation ] | [ Up : Common notation for percussion ] | [ Pitched percussion > ] | ||
Drum rolls
Drum rolls are indicated with three slashes across the stem. For
quarter notes or longer the three slashes are shown explicitly,
eighth notes are shown with two slashes (the beam being the
third), and drum rolls shorter than eighths have one stem slash to
supplement the beams. This is achieved with the tremolo notation,
:32, as described in Tremolo repeats. Here is an
example of some snare rolls:
\drums {
\time 2/4
sn16 sn8 sn16 sn8 sn8:32 ~
sn8 sn8 sn4:32 ~
sn4 sn8 sn16 sn16
sn4 r4
}
Sticking can be indicated by placing ^"R" or ^"L"
after the note. The staff-padding property may be
overridden to achieve a pleasing baseline.
\drums {
\repeat unfold 2 {
sn16 ^"L" sn^"R" sn^"L" sn^"L" sn^"R" sn^"L" sn^"R" sn^"R"
}
}
See also
Snippets: Percussion.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Drum rolls ] | [ Up : Common notation for percussion ] | [ Percussion staves > ] | ||
Pitched percussion
Certain pitched percussion instruments (e.g. xylophone, vibraphone, and timpani) are written using normal staves. This is covered in other sections of the manual.
See also
Notation Reference: Percussion in MIDI.
Snippets: Percussion.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Pitched percussion ] | [ Up : Common notation for percussion ] | [ Custom percussion staves > ] | ||
Percussion staves
A percussion part for more than one instrument typically uses a
multiline staff where each position in the staff refers to one
piece of percussion. To typeset the music, the notes must be
interpreted in DrumStaff and DrumVoice context.
up = \drummode {
crashcymbal4 hihat8 halfopenhihat hh hh hh openhihat
}
down = \drummode {
bassdrum4 snare8 bd r bd sn4
}
\new DrumStaff <<
\new DrumVoice { \voiceOne \up }
\new DrumVoice { \voiceTwo \down }
>>
The above example shows verbose polyphonic notation. The short polyphonic notation, described in I'm hearing Voices, can also be used if the voices are instantiated by hand first. For example,
\new DrumStaff <<
\new DrumVoice = "1" { s1*2 }
\new DrumVoice = "2" { s1*2 }
\drummode {
bd4 sn4 bd4 sn4
<< {
\repeat unfold 16 hh16
} \\ {
bd4 sn4 bd4 sn4
} >>
}
>>
There are also other layout possibilities. To use these, set the
property drumStyleTable in context DrumVoice. The
following variables have been predefined:
-
drums-style This is the default. It typesets a typical drum kit on a five-line staff:
The drum scheme supports six different toms. When there are fewer toms, simply select the toms that produce the desired result. For example, to get toms on the three middle lines you use
tommh,tomml, andtomfh.-
timbales-style This typesets timbales on a two line staff:
-
congas-style This typesets congas on a two line staff:
-
bongos-style This typesets bongos on a two line staff:
-
percussion-style To typeset all kinds of simple percussion on one line staves:
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Percussion staves ] | [ Up : Common notation for percussion ] | [ Ghost notes > ] | ||
Custom percussion staves
If you do not like any of the predefined lists you can define your own list at the top of your file.
#(define mydrums '(
(bassdrum default #f -1)
(snare default #f 0)
(hihat cross #f 1)
(pedalhihat xcircle "stopped" 2)
(lowtom diamond #f 3)))
up = \drummode { hh8 hh hh hh hhp4 hhp }
down = \drummode { bd4 sn bd toml8 toml }
\new DrumStaff <<
\set DrumStaff.drumStyleTable = #(alist->hash-table mydrums)
\new DrumVoice { \voiceOne \up }
\new DrumVoice { \voiceTwo \down }
>>
Selected Snippets
FIXME: MOVE ALL THESE TO LSR! -gp
Here are some examples:
Two Woodblocks, entered with wbh (high woodblock) and wbl (low woodblock)
% These lines define the position of the woodblocks in the stave;
% if you like, you can change it or you can use special note heads
% for the woodblocks.
#(define mydrums '((hiwoodblock default #t 3)
(lowoodblock default #t -2)))
woodstaff = {
% This defines a staff with only two lines.
% It also defines the positions of the two lines.
\override Staff.StaffSymbol #'line-positions = #'(-2 3)
% This is neccessary; if not entered, the barline would be too short!
\override Staff.BarLine #'bar-size = #3
}
\new DrumStaff {
\set DrumStaff.drumStyleTable = #(alist->hash-table mydrums)
% with this you load your new drum style table
\woodstaff
\drummode {
\time 2/4
wbl8 wbl16 wbl wbh8-> wbl |
wbl8 wbl16 wbh-> ~ wbh wbl16 r8 |
}
}
Note that in this special case the length of the barline must
altered with \override Staff.BarLine #'bar-size #number.
Otherwise it would be too short. And you have also to define the
positions of the two stafflines. For more information about these
delicate things have a look at Staff symbol.
A tambourine, entered with ‘tamb’:
#(define mydrums '((tambourine default #t 0)))
tambustaff = {
\override Staff.StaffSymbol #'line-positions = #'( 0 )
\override Staff.BarLine #'bar-size = #3
\set DrumStaff.instrumentName = #"Tambourine"
}
\new DrumStaff {
\tambustaff
\set DrumStaff.drumStyleTable = #(alist->hash-table mydrums)
\drummode {
\time 6/8
tamb8. tamb16 tamb8 tamb tamb tamb |
tamb4. tamb8 tamb tamb |
% the trick with the scaled duration and the shorter rest
% is neccessary for the correct ending of the trill-span!
tamb2.*5/6 \startTrillSpan s8 \stopTrillSpan |
}
}
Music for Tam-Tam (entered with ‘tt’):
#(define mydrums '((tamtam default #t 0)))
tamtamstaff = {
\override Staff.StaffSymbol #'line-positions = #'( 0 )
\override Staff.BarLine #'bar-size = #3
\set DrumStaff.instrumentName = #"Tamtam"
}
\new DrumStaff {
\tamtamstaff
\set DrumStaff.drumStyleTable = #(alist->hash-table mydrums)
\drummode {
tt 1 \pp \laissezVibrer
}
}
Two different bells, entered with ‘cb’ (cowbell) and ‘rb’ (ridebell)
#(define mydrums '((ridebell default #t 3)
(cowbell default #t -2)))
bellstaff = {
\override DrumStaff.StaffSymbol #'line-positions = #'(-2 3)
\set DrumStaff.drumStyleTable = #(alist->hash-table mydrums)
\override Staff.BarLine #'bar-size = #3
\set DrumStaff.instrumentName = #"Different Bells"
}
\new DrumStaff {
\bellstaff
\drummode {
\time 2/4
rb8 rb cb cb16 rb-> ~ |
rb16 rb8 rb16 cb8 cb |
}
}
Here an short example by maestro Stravinsky (from ‘L’histoire du Soldat’)
#(define mydrums '((bassdrum default #t 4)
(snare default #t -4)
(tambourine default #t 0)))
global = {
\time 3/8 s4.
\time 2/4 s2*2
\time 3/8 s4.
\time 2/4 s2
}
drumsA = {
\context DrumVoice <<
{ \global }
{ \drummode {
\autoBeamOff
\stemDown sn8 \stemUp tamb s8 |
sn4 \stemDown sn4 |
\stemUp tamb8 \stemDown sn8 \stemUp sn16 \stemDown sn \stemUp sn8 |
\stemDown sn8 \stemUp tamb s8 |
\stemUp sn4 s8 \stemUp tamb
}
}
>>
}
drumsB = {
\drummode {
s4 bd8 s2*2 s4 bd8 s4 bd8 s8
}
}
\layout {
indent = #40
}
\score {
\new StaffGroup <<
\new DrumStaff {
\set DrumStaff.instrumentName = \markup {
\column {
"Tambourine"
"et"
"caisse claire s. timbre"
}
}
\set DrumStaff.drumStyleTable = #(alist->hash-table mydrums)
\drumsA
}
\new DrumStaff {
\set DrumStaff.instrumentName = #"Grosse Caisse"
\set DrumStaff.drumStyleTable = #(alist->hash-table mydrums)
\drumsB }
>>
}
See also
Snippets: Percussion.
Internals Reference: DrumStaff, DrumVoice.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Custom percussion staves ] | [ Up : Common notation for percussion ] | [ Wind instruments > ] | ||
Ghost notes
Ghost notes for drums and percussion may be created using the
\parenthesize command detailed in Parentheses.
However, the default \drummode does not include the
Parenthesis_engraver plugin which allows this.
\new DrumStaff \with {
\consists "Parenthesis_engraver"
}
<<
\context DrumVoice = "1" { s1 }
\context DrumVoice = "2" { s1 }
\drummode {
<<
{
hh8[ hh] <hh sn> hh16
< \parenthesize sn > hh
< \parenthesize sn > hh8 <hh sn> hh
} \\
{
bd4 r4 bd8 bd r8 bd
}
>>
}
>>
Also note that you must add chords (< > brackets)
around each \parenthesize statement.
See also
Snippets: Percussion.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Ghost notes ] | [ Up : Specialist notation ] | [ Common notation for wind instruments > ] | ||
2.6 Wind instruments
This section includes some elements of music notation that arise when writing for winds.
| 2.6.1 Common notation for wind instruments | ||
| 2.6.2 Bagpipes |
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Wind instruments ] | [ Up : Wind instruments ] | [ References for wind instruments > ] | ||
2.6.1 Common notation for wind instruments
This section discusses some issues common to most wind instruments.
| References for wind instruments | ||
| Fingerings |
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Common notation for wind instruments ] | [ Up : Common notation for wind instruments ] | [ Fingerings > ] | ||
References for wind instruments
Many notation issues for wind instruments pertain to breathing and tonguing:
- Breathing can be specified by rests or Breath marks.
- Legato playing is indicated by Slurs.
- Different types of tonguings, ranging from legato to non-legato to stacatto are usually shown by articulation marks, sometimes combined with slurs, see Articulations and ornamentations and List of articulations.
- Flutter tonguing is usually indicated by placing a tremolo mark and a text markup on the note. See Tremolo repeats.
There are also other aspects of musical notation that can apply to wind instruments:
- Many wind instruments are transposing intruments, see Instrument transpositions.
- The slide glissando are characteristic of the trombone, but other winds may perform keyed or valved glissandi. See Glissando.
- Harmonic series glissandi, which are possible on all brass instruments but common for French Horns, are usually written out as Grace notes.
- Pitch inflections at the end of a note are discussed in Falls and doits.
- Key slaps or valve slaps are often shown by the
crossstyle of Special note heads. - Woodwinds can overblow low notes to sound harmonics. These are
shown by the
flageoletarticulation. See List of articulations. - The use of brass mutes is usually indicated by a text markup, but
where there are many rapid changes it is better to use the
stoppedandopenarticulations. See Articulations and ornamentations and List of articulations. - Stopped horns are indicated by the
stoppedarticulation. See Articulations and ornamentations.
Selected Snippets
Changing \flageolet mark size
To make the \flageolet circle smaller use the following Scheme
function.
smallFlageolet =
#(let ((m (make-music 'ArticulationEvent
'articulation-type "flageolet")))
(ly:music-set-property! m 'tweaks
(acons 'font-size -3
(ly:music-property m 'tweaks)))
m)
\layout { ragged-right = ##f }
\relative c'' {
d4^\flageolet_\markup { default size } d_\flageolet
c4^\smallFlageolet_\markup { smaller } c_\smallFlageolet
}
See also
Notation Reference: Breath marks, Slurs, Articulations and ornamentations, List of articulations, Tremolo repeats, Instrument transpositions, Glissando, Grace notes, Falls and doits, Special note heads,
Snippets: Winds
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < References for wind instruments ] | [ Up : Common notation for wind instruments ] | [ Bagpipes > ] | ||
Fingerings
All wind instruments other than the trombone require the use of several fingers to produce each pitch.
TBC
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Fingerings ] | [ Up : Wind instruments ] | [ Bagpipe definitions > ] | ||
2.6.2 Bagpipes
This section includes extra information for writing for bagpipes.
| Bagpipe definitions | ||
| Bagpipe example |
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Bagpipes ] | [ Up : Bagpipes ] | [ Bagpipe example > ] | ||
Bagpipe definitions
LilyPond contains special definitions for music for the Scottish highland bagpipe; to use them, add
\include "bagpipe.ly"
at the top of your input file. This lets you add the special grace notes
common to bagpipe music with short commands. For example, you could
write \taor instead of
\grace { \small G32[ d G e] }
bagpipe.ly also contains pitch definitions for the bagpipe
notes in the appropriate octaves, so you do not need to worry about
\relative or \transpose.
\include "bagpipe.ly"
{ \grg G4 \grg a \grg b \grg c \grg d \grg e \grg f \grA g A }
Bagpipe music nominally uses the key of D Major (even though that
isn’t really true). However, since that is the only key that can be used,
the key signature is normally not written out. To set this up correctly,
always start your music with \hideKeySignature. If you for some
reason want to show the key signature, you can use \showKeySignature
instead.
Some modern music use cross fingering on c and f to flatten those notes.
This can be indicated by cflat or fflat. Similarly, the
piobaireachd high g can be written gflat when it occurs in light
music.
See also
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Bagpipe definitions ] | [ Up : Bagpipes ] | [ Chord notation > ] | ||
Bagpipe example
This is what the well known tune Amazing Grace looks like in bagpipe notation.
\include "bagpipe.ly"
\layout {
indent = 0.0\cm
\context { \Score \remove "Bar_number_engraver" }
}
\header {
title = "Amazing Grace"
meter = "Hymn"
arranger = "Trad. arr."
}
{
\hideKeySignature
\time 3/4
\grg \partial 4 a8. d16
\slurd d2 \grg f8[ e32 d16.]
\grg f2 \grg f8 e
\thrwd d2 \grg b4
\grG a2 \grg a8. d16
\slurd d2 \grg f8[ e32 d16.]
\grg f2 \grg e8. f16
\dblA A2 \grg A4
\grg A2 f8. A16
\grg A2 \hdblf f8[ e32 d16.]
\grg f2 \grg f8 e
\thrwd d2 \grg b4
\grG a2 \grg a8. d16
\slurd d2 \grg f8[ e32 d16.]
\grg f2 e4
\thrwd d2.
\slurd d2
\bar "|."
}
See also
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Bagpipe example ] | [ Up : Specialist notation ] | [ Chord mode > ] | ||
2.7 Chord notation
Chords can be entered either as normal notes or in chord mode and displayed using a variety of traditional European chord naming conventions. Chord names and figured bass notation can also be displayed.
| 2.7.1 Chord mode | ||
| 2.7.2 Displaying chords | ||
| 2.7.3 Figured bass |
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Chord notation ] | [ Up : Chord notation ] | [ Chord mode overview > ] | ||
2.7.1 Chord mode
Chord mode is used to enter chords using an indicator of the chord structure, rather than the chord pitches.
| Chord mode overview | ||
| Common chords | ||
| Extended and altered chords |
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Chord mode ] | [ Up : Chord mode ] | [ Common chords > ] | ||
Chord mode overview
Chords can be entered as simultaneous music, as discussed in Chorded notes.
Chords can also be entered in “chord mode”, which is an input mode that focuses on the structures of chords in traditional European music, rather than on specific pitches. This is convenient for those who are familiar with using chord names to describe chords. More information on different input modes can be found at Input modes.
\chordmode { c1 g a g c }
Chords entered using chord mode are music elements, and can be transposed just like chords entered using simultaneous music.
Chord mode and note mode can be mixed in sequential music:
<c e g>2 <g b d>
\chordmode { c2 f }
<c e g>2 <g' b d>
\chordmode { f2 g }
See also
Music Glossary: chord.
Notation Reference: Chorded notes, Input modes.
Snippets: Chords
Known issues and warnings
When chord mode and note mode are mixed in sequential music, and
chord mode comes first, the note mode will create a new Staff
context.
\chordmode { c2 f }
<c e g>2 <g' b d>
To avoid this behavior, explicitly create the Staff context:
\new Staff {
\chordmode { c2 f }
<c e g>2 <g' b d>
}
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Chord mode overview ] | [ Up : Chord mode ] | [ Extended and altered chords > ] | ||
Common chords
Major triads are entered by including the root and an optional duration:
\chordmode { c2 f4 g }
Minor, augmented, and diminished triads are entered by placing
: and a quality modifier string after the duration:
\chordmode { c2:m f4:aug g:dim }
Seventh chords can be created:
\chordmode { c1:7 c:m7 c:maj7 c:dim7 c:aug7 }
The table belows shows the actions of the quality modifiers on triads and seventh chords. The default seventh step added to chords is a minor or flatted seventh, which makes the dominant seventh the basic seventh chord. All alterations are relative to the dominant seventh. A more complete table of modifier usage is found at Common chord modifiers.
Modifier | Action | Example |
None | The default action; produces a major triad. | |
m, m7 | The minor chord. This modifier lowers the 3rd. | |
dim, dim7 | The diminished chord. This modifier lowers the 3rd, 5th and (if present) the 7th step. | |
aug | The augmented chord. This modifier raises the 5th step. | |
maj, maj7 | The major 7th chord. This modifier adds a raised 7th step. The
|
See also
Notation Reference: Common chord modifiers, Extended and altered chords.
Snippets: Chords.
Known issues and warnings
Only one quality modifier should be used per chord, typically on the highest step present in the chord. Chords with more than quality modifier will be parsed without an error or warning, but the results are unpredictable. Chords that cannot be achieved with a single quality modifier should be altered by individual pitches, as described in Extended and altered chords.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Common chords ] | [ Up : Chord mode ] | [ Displaying chords > ] | ||
Extended and altered chords
Chord structures of arbitrary complexity can be created in chord mode. The modifier string can be used to extend a chord, add or remove chord steps, raise or lower chord steps, and add a bass note or create an inversion.
The first number following the : is taken to be the extent
of the chord. The chord is constructed by sequentially adding
thirds to the root until the specified number has been reached.
Note that the seventh step added as part of an extended chord will be the
minor or flatted seventh, not the major seventh.
If the extent is not a third (e.g., 6), thirds are added up to the
highest third below the extent, and then the step of the extent is
added. The largest possible value for the extent is 13. Any
larger value is interpreted as 13.
\chordmode {
c1:2 c:3 c:4 c:5
c1:6 c:7 c:8 c:9
c1:10 c:11 c:12 c:13
c1:14
}
Note that both c:5 and c produce a C major triad.
Since an unaltered 11 does not sound good when combined with an
unaltered 13, the 11 is removed from a :13 chord (unless it
is added explicitly).
\chordmode {
c1:13 c:13.11 c:m13
}
Individual steps can be added to a chord. Additions follow the
extent and are prefixed by a dot (.). The basic seventh
step added to a chord is the minor or flatted seventh, rather than
the major seventh.
\chordmode {
c1:5.6 c:3.7.8 c:3.6.13
}
Added steps can be as high as desired.
\chordmode {
c4:5.15 c:5.20 c:5.25 c:5.30
}
Added chord steps can be altered by suffixing a - or +
sign to the number. To alter a step that is automatically included
as part of the basic chord structure, add it as an altered step.
\chordmode {
c1:7+ c:5+.3- c:3-.5-.7-
}
Following any steps to be added, a series of steps to be removed
is introduced in a modifier string with a prefix of ^.
If more than one step is to be removed, the steps to be
removed are separated by . following the
initial ^.
\chordmode {
c1^3 c:7^5 c:9^3 c:9^3.5 c:13.11^3.7
}
The modifier sus can be added to the modifier string to
create suspended chords. This removes the 3rd step from the chord.
Append either 2 or 4 to add the 2nd or 4th step to the
chord. sus is equivalent to ^3; sus4 is
equivalent to .4^3.
\chordmode {
c1:sus c:sus2 c:sus4 c:5.4^3
}
Inversions (putting a pitch other than the root on the bottom of the
chord) and added bass notes can be specified by appending
/pitch to the chord.
\chordmode {
c1 c/g c/f
}
A bass note that is part of the chord can be added, instead of
moved as part of an inversion, by using /+pitch.
\chordmode {
c1 c/g c/+g
}
Chord modifiers that can be used to produce a variety of standard chords are shown in Common chord modifiers.
See also
Notation Reference: Common chord modifiers.
Snippets: Chords
Known issues and warnings
Each step can only be present in a chord once. The following
simply produces the augmented chord, since 5+ is
interpreted last.
\chordmode { c1:5.5-.5+ }
Only the second inversion can be created by adding a bass note. The first inversion requires changing the root of the chord.
\chordmode {
c'1: c':/g e:6-3-^5 e:m6-^5
}
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Extended and altered chords ] | [ Up : Chord notation ] | [ Printing chord names > ] | ||
2.7.2 Displaying chords
Chords can be displayed by name, in addition to the standard display as notes on a staff.
| Printing chord names | ||
| Customizing chord names |
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Displaying chords ] | [ Up : Displaying chords ] | [ Customizing chord names > ] | ||
Printing chord names
Chord names are printed in the ChordNames context:
\new ChordNames {
\chordmode {
c2 f4. g8
}
}
Chords can be entered as simultaneous notes or through the use of chord mode. The displayed chord name will be the same, regardless of the mode of entry, unless there are inversions or added bass notes:
<<
\new ChordNames {
<c e g>2 <f bes c>
<f c' e g>1
\chordmode {
c2 f:sus4 c1:/f
}
}
{
<c e g>2 <f bes c>
<f, c' e g>1
\chordmode {
c2 f:sus4 c1:/f
}
}
>>
\chords { ... } is a shortcut notation for
\new ChordNames { \chordmode { ... } }.
\chords {
c2 f4.:m g8:maj7
}
\new ChordNames {
\chordmode {
c2 f4.:m g8:maj7
}
}
Selected Snippets
Showing chords at changes
Chord names can be displayed only at the start of lines and when the chord changes.
harmonies = \chordmode {
c1:m c:m \break c:m c:m d
}
<<
\new ChordNames {
\set chordChanges = ##t
\harmonies
}
\new Staff {
\relative c' { \harmonies }
}
>>
Simple lead sheet
When put together, chord names, a melody, and lyrics form a lead sheet:
<<
\chords { c2 g:sus4 f e }
\relative c'' {
a4 e c8 e r4
b2 c4( d)
}
\addlyrics { One day this shall be free __ }
>>
See also
Music Glossary: chord.
Notation Reference: Writing music in parallel.
Snippets: Chords.
Internals Reference: ChordNames, ChordName, Chord_name_engraver, Volta_engraver, Bar_engraver.
Known issues and warnings
Chords containing inversions or altered bass notes are not named properly if entered using simultaneous music.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Printing chord names ] | [ Up : Displaying chords ] | [ Figured bass > ] | ||
Customizing chord names
There is no unique system for naming chords. Different musical traditions use different names for the same set of chords. There are also different symbols displayed for a given chord name. The names and symbols displayed for chord names are customizable.
The basic chord name layout is a system for Jazz music, proposed by Klaus Ignatzek (see Literature list). The chord naming system can be modified as described below. An alternate jazz chord system has been developed using these modifications. The Ignatzek and alternate Jazz notation are shown on the chart in Chord name chart.
In addition to the different naming systems, different note names
are used for the root in different languages. The predefined
variables \germanChords, \semiGermanChords,
\italianChords and \frenchChords set these variables.
The effect is demonstrated here:
If none of the existing settings give the desired output, the chord name display can be tuned through the following properties.
-
chordRootNamer -
The chord name is usually printed as a letter for the root with an optional alteration. The transformation from pitch to letter is done by this function. Special note names (for example, the German ‘H’ for a B-chord) can be produced by storing a new function in this property.
-
majorSevenSymbol -
This property contains the markup object used to follow the output of
chordRootNamerto identify a major 7 chord. Predefined options arewhiteTriangleMarkupandblackTriangleMarkup. -
chordNoteNamer -
When the chord name contains additional pitches other than the root (e.g., an added bass note), this function is used to print the additional pitch. By default the pitch is printed using
chordRootNamer. ThechordNoteNamerproperty can be set to a specialized function to change this behavior. For example, the bass note can be printed in lower case. -
chordNameSeparator -
Different parts of a chord name are normally separated by a slash. By setting
chordNameSeparator, you can use any desired markup for a separator. -
chordNameExceptions -
This property is a list of pairs. The first item in each pair is a set of pitches used to identify the steps present in the chord. The second item is a markup that will follow the
chordRootNameroutput to create the chord name. -
chordPrefixSpacer -
The ‘m’ for minor chords is usually printed immediately to the right of the root of the chord. A spacer can be placed between the root and ‘m’ by setting
chordPrefixSpacer. The spacer is not used when the root is altered.
Predefined commands
\whiteTriangleMarkup,
\blackTriangleMarkup,
\germanChords,
\semiGermanChords,
\italianChords,
\frenchChords.
Selected Snippets
Chord name exceptions
The property chordNameExceptions can be used to store a list of
special notations for specific chords.
% modify maj9 and 6(add9)
% Exception music is chords with markups
chExceptionMusic = {
<c e g b d'>1-\markup { \super "maj9" }
<c e g a d'>1-\markup { \super "6(add9)" }
}
% Convert music to list and prepend to existing exceptions.
chExceptions = #( append
( sequential-music-to-chord-exceptions chExceptionMusic #t)
ignatzekExceptions)
theMusic = \chordmode {
g1:maj9 g1:6.9
\set chordNameExceptions = #chExceptions
g1:maj9 g1:6.9
}
\layout {
ragged-right = ##t
}
<< \context ChordNames \theMusic
\context Voice \theMusic
>>
chord name major7
The layout of the major 7 can be tuned with majorSevenSymbol.
\chords {
c:7+
\set majorSevenSymbol = \markup { j7 }
c:7+
}
Adding bar lines to ChordNames context
To add bar line indications in the ChordNames context, add the
Bar_engraver.
\new ChordNames \with {
\override BarLine #'bar-size = #4
\consists "Bar_engraver"
}
\chordmode {
f1:maj7 f:7 bes:7
}
Volta below chords
By adding the Volta_engraver to the relevant staff, volte can be
put under chords.
\score {
<<
\chords {
c1
c1
}
\new Staff \with {
\consists "Volta_engraver"
}
{
\repeat volta 2 { c'1 }
\alternative { c' }
}
>>
\layout {
\context {
\Score
\remove "Volta_engraver"
}
}
}
Changing chord separator
The separator between different parts of a chord name can be set to any markup.
\chords {
c:7sus4
\set chordNameSeparator
= \markup { \typewriter | }
c:7sus4
}
See also
Notation Reference: Chord name chart, Common chord modifiers.
Installed Files: ‘scm/chords-ignatzek.scm’, ‘scm/chord-entry.scm’, ‘ly/chord-modifier-init.ly’.
Snippets: Chords.
Known issues and warnings
Chord names are determined from both the pitches that are present
in the chord and the information on the chord structure that may
have been entered in \chordmode. If the simultaneous pitches
method of entering chords is used, undesired names result from
inversions or bass notes.
myChords = \relative c' {
\chordmode { c1 c/g c/f }
<c e g>1 <g c e> <f c' e g>
}
<<
\new ChordNames { \myChords }
\new Staff { \myChords }
>>
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Customizing chord names ] | [ Up : Chord notation ] | [ Introduction to figured bass > ] | ||
2.7.3 Figured bass
Figured bass notation can be displayed.
| Introduction to figured bass | ||
| Entering figured bass | ||
| Displaying figured bass |
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Figured bass ] | [ Up : Figured bass ] | [ Entering figured bass > ] | ||
Introduction to figured bass
LilyPond has support for figured bass, also called thorough bass or basso continuo:
<<
\new Voice { \clef bass dis4 c d ais g fis}
\new FiguredBass {
\figuremode {
< 6 >4 < 7\+ >8 < 6+ [_!] >
< 6 >4 <6 5 [3+] >
< _ >4 < 6 5/>4
}
}
>>
The support for figured bass consists of two parts: there is an
input mode, introduced by \figuremode, that accepts
entry of bass figures, and there is a context named
FiguredBass that takes care of displaying
BassFigure objects. Figured bass can also be displayed
in Staff contexts.
\figures{ ... } is a shortcut notation for
\new FiguredBass { \figuremode { ... } }.
Although the support for figured bass may superficially resemble chord
support, it is much simpler. \figuremode mode simply
stores the figures and the FiguredBass context prints them
as entered. There is no conversion to pitches.
See also
Music Glossary: figured bass.
Snippets: Chords
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Introduction to figured bass ] | [ Up : Figured bass ] | [ Displaying figured bass > ] | ||
Entering figured bass
\figuremode is used to switch the input mode to figure mode.
More information on different input modes can be
found at Input modes.
In figure mode, a group of bass figures is delimited by
< and >. The duration is entered after the >.
\new FiguredBass {
\figuremode {
<6 4>2
}
}
Accidentals (including naturals) can be added to figures:
\figures {
<7! 6+ 4-> <5++> <3-->
}
Augmented and diminished steps can be indicated:
\figures {
<6\+ 5/> <7/>
}
A backward slash through a figure (typically used for raised sixth steps) can be created:
\figures {
<6> <6\\>
}
Vertical spaces and brackets can be be included in figures:
\figures {
<[12 _!] 8 [6 4]>
}
Any text markup can be inserted as a figure:
\figures {
<\markup { \tiny \number 6 \super (1) } 5>
}
Continuation lines can be used to indicate repeated figures:
<<
{
\clef bass
e4 d c b,
e4 d c b,
}
\figures {
\bassFigureExtendersOn
<6 4>4 <6 3> <7 3> <7 3>
\bassFigureExtendersOff
<6 4>4 <6 3> <7 3> <7 3>
}
>>
In this case, the extender lines replace existing figures, unless the continuation lines have been explicitly terminated.
<<
\figures {
\bassFigureExtendersOn
<6 4>4 <6 4> <6\! 4\!> <6 4>
}
{
\clef bass
d4 d c c
}
>>
The table below summarizes the figure modifiers available.
Modifier | Purpose | Example |
+, -, ! | Accidentals | |
\+, / | Augmented and diminished steps | |
\\ | Raised sixth step | |
\! | End of continuation line |
Predefined commands
\bassFigureExtendersOn,
\bassFigureExtendersOff.
Selected Snippets
Changing the positions of figured bass alterations
Accidentals and plus signs can appear before or after the numbers,
depending on the figuredBassAlterationDirection and
figuredBassPlusDirection properties.
\figures {
<6\+> <5+> <6 4-> r
\set figuredBassAlterationDirection = #RIGHT
<6\+> <5+> <6 4-> r
\set figuredBassPlusDirection = #RIGHT
<6\+> <5+> <6 4-> r
\set figuredBassAlterationDirection = #LEFT
<6\+> <5+> <6 4-> r
}
See also
Snippets: Chords.
Internals Reference: BassFigure, BassFigureAlignment, BassFigureLine, BassFigureBracket, BassFigureContinuation, FiguredBass.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Entering figured bass ] | [ Up : Figured bass ] | [ Ancient notation > ] | ||
Displaying figured bass
Figured bass can be displayed using the FiguredBass context,
or in most staff contexts.
When displayed in a FiguredBass context, the vertical location
of the figures is independent of the notes on the staff.
<<
\relative c'' {
c4 c'8 r8 c,4 c'
}
\new FiguredBass {
\figuremode {
<4>4 <10 6>8 s8
<6 4>4 <6 4>
}
}
>>
In the example above, the FiguredBass context must be
explicitly instantiated to avoid creating a second (empty) staff.
Figured bass can also be added to Staff contexts
directly. In this case, the vertical position of the
figures is adjusted automatically.
<<
\new Staff = myStaff
\figuremode {
<4>4 <10 6>8 s8
<6 4>4 <6 4>
}
%% Put notes on same Staff as figures
\context Staff = myStaff
{
\clef bass
c4 c'8 r8 c4 c'
}
>>
When added in a Staff context, figured bass can be displayed above
or below the staff.
<<
\new Staff = myStaff
\figuremode {
<4>4 <10 6>8 s8
\bassFigureStaffAlignmentDown
<6 4>4 <6 4>
}
%% Put notes on same Staff as figures
\context Staff = myStaff
{
\clef bass
c4 c'8 r8 c4 c'
}
>>
Predefined commands
\bassFigureStaffAlignmentDown,
\bassFigureStaffAlignmentUp,
\bassFigureStaffAlignmentNeutral.
See also
Snippets: Chords.
Internals Reference: BassFigure, BassFigureAlignment, BassFigureLine, BassFigureBracket, BassFigureContinuation, FiguredBass.
Known issues and warnings
To ensure that continuation lines work properly, it is safest to use the same rhythm in the figure line as in the bass line.
<<
{
\clef bass
\repeat unfold 4 { f16. g32 } f8. es16 d8 es
}
\figures {
\bassFigureExtendersOn
% The extenders are correct here, with the same rhythm as the bass
\repeat unfold 4 { <6 4->16. <6 4->32 }
<5>8. r16 <6>8 <6\! 5->
}
>>
<<
{
\clef bass
\repeat unfold 4 { f16. g32 } f8. es16 d8 es
}
\figures {
\bassFigureExtendersOn
% The extenders are incorrect here, even though the timing is the same
<6 4->4 <6 4->4
<5>8. r16 <6>8 <6\! 5->
}
>>
When using extender lines, adjacent figures with the same number in a different figure location can cause the figure positions to invert.
<<
{ fis4 g g, e' }
\figures {
\bassFigureExtendersOn
<6 5>4 <5\! 4> < 5 _!> <6>
}
>>
To avoid this problem, simply turn on extenders after the figure that begins the extender line and turn them off at the end of the extender line.
<<
{ fis4 g g, e' }
\figures {
<6 5>4 <5 4>
\bassFigureExtendersOn
< 5 _!>4 <6>
\bassFigureExtendersOff
}
>>
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Displaying figured bass ] | [ Up : Specialist notation ] | [ Overview of the supported styles > ] | ||
2.8 Ancient notation
Support for ancient notation includes features for mensural notation and Gregorian chant notation. These features can be accessed either by modifying style properties of graphical objects such as note heads and rests, or by using one of the pre-defined contexts for mensural or Gregorian notation.
Many graphical objects, such as note heads and flags, accidentals,
time signatures, and rests, provide a style property, which
can be changed to emulate several different styles of ancient
notation. See
- Mensural note heads,
- Mensural accidentals and key signatures,
- Mensural rests,
- Mensural clefs,
- Gregorian clefs,
- Mensural flags,
- Mensural time signatures.
Some notational concepts are introduced specifically for ancient notation,
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Ancient notation ] | [ Up : Ancient notation ] | [ Ancient notation---common features > ] | ||
2.8.1 Overview of the supported styles
Three styles are available for typesetting Gregorian chant:
- Editio Vaticana is a complete style for Gregorian chant, following the appearance of the Solesmes editions, the official chant books of the Vatican since 1904. Lilypond has support for all the notational signs used in this style, including ligatures, custodes, and special signs such as the quilisma and the oriscus.
- The Editio Medicaea style offers certain features used in the Medicaea (or Ratisbona) editions which were used prior to the Solesmes editions. The most significant differences from the Vaticana style are the clefs, which have downward-slanted strokes, and the noteheads, which are square and regular.
- The Hufnagel (“horseshoe nail”) or Gothic style mimics the writing style in chant manuscripts from Germany and Central Europe during the middle ages. It is named after the basic note shape (the virga), which looks like a small nail.
Three styles emulate the appearance of late-medieval and renaissance manuscripts and prints of mensural music:
- The Mensural style most closely resembles the writing style used in late-medieval and early renaissance manuscripts, with its small and narrow, diamond-shaped noteheads and its rests which approach a hand-drawn style.
- The Neomensural style is a modernized and stylized version of the former: the noteheads are broader and the rests are made up of straight lines. This style is particularly suited, e.g., for incipits of transcribed pieces of mensural music.
- The Petrucci style is named after Ottaviano Petrucci (1466-1539), the first printer to use movable type for music (in his Harmonice musices odhecaton, 1501). The style uses larger note heads than the other mensural styles.
Baroque and Classical are not complete styles but differ from the default style only in some details: certain noteheads (Baroque) and the quarter rest (Classical).
Only the mensural style has alternatives for all aspects of the notation. Thus, there are no rests or flags in the Gregorian styles, since these signs are not used in plainchant notation, and the Petrucci style has no flags or accidentals of its own.
Each element of the notation can be changed independently of the others, so that one can use mensural flags, petrucci noteheads, classical rests and vaticana clefs in the same piece, if one wishes.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Overview of the supported styles ] | [ Up : Ancient notation ] | [ Pre-defined contexts > ] | ||
2.8.2 Ancient notation—common features
| Pre-defined contexts | ||
| Ligatures | ||
| Custodes | ||
| Figured bass support |
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Ancient notation---common features ] | [ Up : Ancient notation---common features ] | [ Ligatures > ] | ||
Pre-defined contexts
For Gregorian chant and mensural notation, there are pre-defined
voice and staff contexts available, which set all the various
notation signs to values suitable for these styles. If one is
satisfied with these defaults, one can proceed directly with note
entry without worrying about the details on how to customize a
context. See one of the pre-defined contexts
VaticanaVoice, VaticanaStaff, MensuralVoice,
and MensuralStaff. See further
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Pre-defined contexts ] | [ Up : Ancient notation---common features ] | [ Custodes > ] | ||
Ligatures
A ligature is a graphical symbol that represents at least two distinct notes. Ligatures originally appeared in the manuscripts of Gregorian chant notation to denote ascending or descending sequences of notes on the same syllable. They are also used in mensural notation.
Ligatures are entered by enclosing them in \[ and
\]. Some ligature styles may need additional input syntax
specific for this particular type of ligature. By default, the
LigatureBracket engraver just puts a square bracket
above the ligature.
\transpose c c' {
\[ g c a f d' \]
a g f
\[ e f a g \]
}
Two other ligature styles are available: the Vaticana for
Gregorian chant, and the Mensural for mensural music (only white
mensural ligatures are supported for mensural music, and with
certain limitations). To use any of these styles, the default
Ligature_bracket_engraver has to be replaced with one of the
specialized ligature engravers in the
Voice context,
as explained in White mensural ligatures and Gregorian square neume ligatures.
See also
Known issues and warnings
Ligatures need special spacing that has not yet been implemented. As a result, there is too much space between ligatures most of the time, and line breaking often is unsatisfactory. Also, lyrics do not correctly align with ligatures.
Accidentals must not be printed within a ligature, but instead need to be collected and printed in front of it.
The syntax still uses the deprecated infix style \[ music expr
\]. For consistency reasons, it will eventually be changed to
postfix style note\[ ... note\].
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Ligatures ] | [ Up : Ancient notation---common features ] | [ Figured bass support > ] | ||
Custodes
A custos (plural: custodes; Latin word for “guard”) is a symbol that appears at the end of a staff. It anticipates the pitch of the first note of the following line, thus helping the performer to manage line breaks during performance.
Custodes were frequently used in music notation until the seventeenth century. Nowadays, they have survived only in a few particular forms of musical notation such as contemporary editions of Gregorian chant like the Editio Vaticana. There are different custos glyphs used in different flavors of notational style.
For typesetting custodes, just put a
Custos_engraver into the
Staff context when declaring the \layout block,
and change the style of the custos with an \override if
desired, as shown in the following example:
The custos glyph is selected by the style property. The styles
supported are vaticana, medicaea, hufnagel, and
mensural. They are demonstrated in the following fragment
See also
Internals Reference: Custos.
Examples: Ancient notation.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Custodes ] | [ Up : Ancient notation---common features ] | [ Typesetting mensural music > ] | ||
Figured bass support
There is limited support for figured bass notation from the Baroque period; see Figured bass.
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Figured bass support ] | [ Up : Ancient notation ] | [ Mensural contexts > ] | ||
2.8.3 Typesetting mensural music
| [ << Specialist notation ] | [Top][Contents][Index][ ? ] | [ General input and output >> ] | ||
| [ < Typesetting mensural music ] | [ Up : Typesetting mensural music ] | [ Mensural clefs > ] | ||
Mensural contexts
The predefined MensuralVoice and MensuralStaff
contexts can be used to engrave a piece in mensural style. These
contexts initialize all relevant context properties and grob
properties to proper values, so you can immediately go ahead
entering the chant, as the following excerpt demonstrates:
\score {
<<
\new MensuralVoice = "discantus" \transpose c c' {
\override Score.BarNumber #'transparent = ##t {
c'1\melisma bes a g\melismaEnd
f\breve
\[ f1\melisma a c'\breve d'\melismaEnd \]
c'\longa
c'\breve\melisma a1 g1\melismaEnd
fis\longa^\signumcongruentiae
}
}
\new Lyrics \lyricsto "discantus" {
San -- ctus, San -- ctus, San -- ctus
}
>>
}
See also
TODO: nothing here yet ...
| [ << Specialist notation ] | |||